■!''^t:' 


NOTICE 


,  IW^i^  many  ctlitiwiis  of  ni\'  '' INFANTRY 
iNL)  RIFLE  TACTICS"  having  l.tt.-ly  be.-n 
mblislied,  I  tliiiik  h  due  to  both  the  Publk'  and 
'(iblishers  io  st.itc: 

5.€^  That  the  COPYRKJIIT  EDITION  vf  my 
NFANTKY  and  RIFLE  TACTK\S,  i)ublished 

•y  S.  H.  GOr.TZRT.  &  n(  ).,  in 

doHiLE,  is  the  only  COMPLETE,  CORRECT 
)i(l  REVISED  EDITION,  and  this  edition 
»XLY  contains  the  improvcnicuts  and  changes 
\hich  I  h;nc  recently  made,  adajiting  tiie manual 
1)  the  use  of  the  arms  generally  in  the  hands  of 
Ijie  troops  in  the  (^wifederate  St;ites. 

W.  J.  HARDEE, 
Colonel  Confrflrr/ttr  Sffif&s  Artiiy. 
FOKT    MOKC  AX,  JlUK^  JHtll.   18(11. 


.  ROOM 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
DURHAM.  N.  C. 


PRESENTED  BY 

W.  W.  FLOWERS 


I 


S.H.GOETZELS^.  CO. 

PIBLISIIERS  A.\I)  liOOKSELLEE^. 

JUST  PUBLISHED, 

THE  WAR  IN  NICARAGUA, 

WKITTKN   BY 
GEN.     WM.     VA^ALKER, 

One  Volume,  12mn   T'loth,  coniplcte $1   -"'O 

ilo  Hnlf  Cnlf. '^  f'O 

SONGS  AND  POEMS  OF  THK  SOUTH, 

BY   HON.   A.    B.    MEEK, 

One  Volume,  ISmo.  Cloth SI   00 

do.  do.    Gilt 125 

do.  Morocco  Extra 2  50 

Romantic  Fai^sages  in  Soutliweslern  History, 

BY   HON.   A.   B.   MEEK, 
One  Volmne,  l2mo.  Cloth $1  25 

THE    RED    EAGLE, 

BY   HON.   A.    B.   MEEK, 
One  Vohime,  Svo.  Cloth $1  00 

THE  CODE  OF  ORI>Il\AJ\CES 

F  (>  U 

THE     CITY     OF     MOBILE, 

BY  HON.  ALEX.  McKINSTRY, 
One  Vohime,  Svo.  Sheep .f 4  00 

Kev.  Dr.  P.  P.  Neely's  Sermons, 

One  Volume.  12mo.  Cloth $1  25 


By  M'me  OOTAVIA  WALTON  LeVERT, 

Two  VolutiK^s,  1-,'ino.  Clolh, $2  "00 

Cloth  Gilt 2  50 

Half  Morocco  Gilt ..4  00 

Turk      do.      Ant 6  00 

The*  Discovery  of  FraakJio^ 

BY  J.  J.  TURNER. 

Ov.r  Vvhmio,  ]2ino.  Hoth (l^  couis. 

Iloi'izoiital  I'luwiiiii,'  and  Hill-Side  Ditcliing, 

By  Dr.  N.  T.   SORSBY,  of  Ala., 
One  V(jlumc,  Piipor ."iO  routs. 

ELLEN;  or,  THE  FANATIC'S  DAUCHTElT, 

BY    MRS.    N.   G.   COWDIN. 
Ono  Volimio,   12ino.  Cloth $]  25 

:o:  .a^  :e^  x>  :s  ::s '  ® 

mil  m  mmM  imm, 

Two  V(,lu!n(s,  '2 htio : $2  50 

do.  do.       h'vo 2  CO 

One  Vohniic,  Hvo.,  eiiiicr  Ifit  or  2d  soi)nriito.. 1  00 

1^;^  Orders  from  ;i')r<)a(l  ;i re l•e^Jpectt'Illly  requested 
U)  give  li»B«>itiaict  E>ir<;€S3«Bis  <>f  their  Tost  Of- 
fices, LaiuliiigK  or  liaili-oad  Statimis. 

MOBILE,     AI.A. 


'^i 


^•^-^ 


lOC-iuaaiZ)    ooDDCScai 


-i 


ju-^- 


THE  ONLY     COPYRIGHT  EDITION. 


RIFLE 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


REVISED  AND  IMPROVED 


Brig.  Gen.  W.  J.  HARDEE,  0.  S.  ARMY. 


FIFTH   EDITION. 


Vol.  I. 

SCHOOLS  OF  THE  SOLDIER  AND  COMPANY 
INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


MOBILE: 

S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 


FIRST   YEAR   OF   THE   CONFEDERACY. 


THE  fLOms  COLLECTION  -  j'i 


li. 


V. 


a 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1861,  by 

S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Alabama,  for  the 
Confederate  States  of  America. 


O  ^J 


H77891 


RIFLE  AND  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE    FIRST 


Article  First. 
Formation  of  a  Kegiment  in  order  of  Battlcy 
or  in  Line. 

1.  A  Regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies, 
which  will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to  left,  in 
the  following  order:  first,  sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third, 
eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seventh,  second,  according  to  the 
rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  prin- 
ciple will  be  observed,  viz :  the  first  captain  will  com- 
mand the  right  company,  the  second  captain  the  left 
company,  the  third  captain  the  right  centre  company, 
and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  diesiguated 
from  right  to  left,  first  company,  second  company, 
<fcc.  This  designation  will  be  observed  in  the  man- 
oeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  tHe  right,  whatever 
their  denomination,  will  form  the  first  division ;  the 

277891 


6  F0RMATT:;N  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

next  two  compani  ?8  the  second  division ;  and  so  on  to 
the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equa^ 
parts,  which  will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second 
platoon,  countiug  from  the  right ;  and  eachphitoon,  in 
like  manner,  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections, 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  inanteuvres,  every  regiment' 
or  part  of  a  regiment,  comi»osed  of  two  or  more  com" 
panics,  w^ill  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  gnard  to  be  hereinafter  des- 
ignated, will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre 
battalion  company.  That  company,  and  all  on  its 
right,  will  be  denominated  the  rifjhi  wing,  of  the  bat- 
talion ;  the  remaining  companies  the  left  icing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks  : 
and  each  company  will  he  fn-ined  into  two  ranks,  in 
the  following  manner:  the  corporals  will  be  posted  in 
the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons, 
according  to  height ;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  tallest 
man  will  form  the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest  men 
will  form  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file, 
which  will  be  composed  of  the  shortest  corporal  and 
the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two» 
in  the  company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of 
four  men,  who  will  be  designated  comrades  in  hnttlc. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  \\\V- 
be  thirteen  inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the 
rear  rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front 
rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion 
will  always  be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from  the 
strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  7 

Posts  of   Company    Officers,    Sergeants  and 
Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  aj-e  nine  in 
number,  and  will  be  po-sted  in  the  following  manner: 

13.  The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touch- 
ing with  the  left  elbow._ 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow,  and  covering  captain.  In  the 
mancEuvres  be  will  be  denominated  covering  sergeant, 
or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  otficers  and  sergeants  will  be 
posted  as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  beiiind  the  rear 
rank. 

16.  The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
fourth  section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon. 

18.  The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
second  platoon. 

19.  Th  '  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he 
will  be  designated  left  guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion, 
the  second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
and  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 


8  FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
as  prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — 
officers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals.  The 
colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from  one  com- 
pany to  command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain 
and  first  lieutenant  are  absent ;  but  this  authority  will 
give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  de- 
tached. 


Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 


26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and 
major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active 
service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when  the 
battalion  is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  file  closers,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
battalion.  This  distance  wili  be  reduced  whenever 
there  is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be  op- 
posite the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respec- 
tively, and  twelve  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  oppo- 
site the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively, 
and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  tli® 
lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the  man- 
CBUvres. 


4 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTaLIuN.  !> 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  latter  by  themajoi".  If  all  the 
Field  officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will  com- 
mand the  battalion;  bnt  if  either  be  present,  he  will 
not  call  the  senior  captain  to  act  ti-  field  officer,  except 
iu  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff" 
officers,  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and 
three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  qua  rter-master  sergeant,  on  a  line  with  the 
front  rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  the 
right. 


Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 


34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and 
posted  twelve  paces  in  re^ir  of  the  file  clc-jors — the 
left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  company. 
The  senior  principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  iu  front 
of  the  field  music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in  the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be 
drawn  up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  num- 
bers, and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music, 
having  one  of  the  principle  musicians  at  its  head. 


Color-guard. 

36.  In  each  battalion  the  c(tl«;r-guard  will  be  com- 
posed of  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the 
right  centre  company,  of  which  company,  fi.'r  the  time 
being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 
2* 


10  FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant, 
to  be  selected  by  the  colonel,  who  wilf  be  called,  for 
the  time,  color-hcarcr,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals, 
respectively,  on  his  right  and  left ;  the  rear  rank  will 
be  composed  of  the  three  corporals  next  in  rank  ;  and 
the  three  remaining  corporals  will  be  posted  in  their 
rear,  and  on  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  left  guide  of 
the  color  company,  when  these  three  last  named  cor- 
porals are  in  the  rank  of  tile  closers,  will  be  immedi- 
ately on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  lesS  than  five  companies  pre 
sent,  there  will  be  no  color- guard,  and  no  display  of 
colors,  except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  selec- 
ted from  those  mostdistinguishedfop regularity  and  pre- 
cision, as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms  as  in  their 
marching.  The  latter  advantage,  and  a  just  carriage 
of  the  person,  are  to  be  more  pai-ticularly  sought  for  in 
the  selection  of  the  color-bearer. 


General*  Guides. 


40.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battal- 
ion, selected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among 
the  sergeants  (other  than  first  sergeants)  the  most  dis- 
tinguished for  carriage  under  arms,  and  accuracy  in 
marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  bo  respectively  denomina 
ted,  in  the  manoeuvres,  right  general  guide,  and  leji 
general  gitil: ,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers; 
th  '  firft  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the  second  in  rear  of 
the  left  flMuk  uf  the  battalion. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


ARTICLE   SECOND. 

Instruction  of  the  'Battalion. 

42.  Every  commaiuling  officer  is  responsible  for  the 
instruction  of  his  command.  He  will  assemble  the 
officers  together  for  theoretical  and  practical  instruc- 
tion as  often  as  he  may  judge  necessary,  and  when  un- 
able to  attend  to  this  duty  in  person,  it  will  be  dis- 
charged by  the  officer  next  iu  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theore- 
tical and  practical  instruction  of  the  non-commission- 
ed officers,  and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruction  of  the 
non-commissioned  statF.  To  this  end,  they  will  re 
quire  these  tactics  to  be  studied  and  recited  lesson  by 
lesson  ;  and  when  instruction  is  given  on  the  ground, 
each  non-C(Uiimis8ione('  officer,  as  he  explains  a  move- 
ment, should  be  required  to  put  it  into  practical  opera- 
tion. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be 
practised  in  giving  commands.  Each  command,  in  a 
lesson,  at  the  theoretical  instruction,  should  first  be 
given  by  the  instructor,  and  then  repeated,  in  succes- 
sion, by  the  non-commissioned  officers,  so  that  while 
they  become  habituated  to  the  commauds,  uniformity 
may  be  established  in  the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers 
will  be  the  instructors  of  the  squads;  but  if  there  be 
not  a  sufficient  number  of  company  officers  present,  in- 
telligent sergeants  may  be  substituted;  and  two  or 


12  IN.^T1U'C'J  ION  or  THE  lUTTALfON. 

three  squads,  undei-  sergeant  iustriictors,  be  superin- 
tended, at  the  same  time,  by  an  oflieer. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company^  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be  the 
piincipal  instructors,  substituting  frequently  the  cap- 
tain of  the  Ciimpany,  and  sometimes  one  of  the  lieu- 
tenants; the  substitute,  as  far  as  practicable,  being 
superintended  by  one  of  the  principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier  gen- 
eral may  constitute  himself  the  principal  instructor, 
frequently  substituting  the  coh)uel  of  the  battalion, 
sometimes  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major,  and  twice 
or  thrice,  in  the  same  course  of  instruction,  each  of 
the  three  senior  captains.  In  this  school,  also,  the 
substitute  will  always,  if  practicable,  be  superintended 
by  the  brigadijer  general  or  the  colonel,  or  (in  case  of 
a  captain  being  tlie  iustructorj,  by  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel or  m  -jor. 

48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of  the  in- 
struction of  companies,  on  which  that  of  the  regiment 
depends,  and  the  first  principles  having  the  greatest 
influence  upon  this  individual  inKtructi(m,  classes  of  re- 
cruits should  be  watched  with  the  greatest  care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  pre- 
cise words,  the  movement  to  be  executed;  and  not  to 
overburden  the  memor.y  of  the  men,  they  will  always 
use  the  same  terms  to  explain  the  same  principles. 

50.  Tliey  should  often  join  example  to  precept, 
should  keep  up  the  attention  of  the  men  by  an  animii 
ted  tone,  and  pass  rapidly  from  one  movement  to 
another,  as  soon  as  that  which  they  c<nnmnnd  lias  been 
executed,  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  13 

51.  The  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when  requir- 
ed to  be  used,  either  for  atta'ek  or  defence  ;  the  ex- 
ercises and  manoeuvres  will  be  executed  without  the 
bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet  trt 
be  fixed,  the  chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause  the  sig- 
nal to^^x  hoyouct  to  be  sftunded;  at  this  signal  the  men 
will  fix  bayonets  without  command,  and  immediately 
replace  their  pieces  in  the  position  they  were  before 
the  signal. 


Listrucfion  of  Officers. 


53.  The  instruction  of  oflicers  can  be  perfected  only 
by  joining  theory  to  practice.  The  colonel  will  often 
j/j-actice  them  in  marching  and  in  estimating  distances, 
and  he  will  care/ully  endeavor  to  cause  them  to  take 
steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness.  They  will  also  be 
exercised  in  the  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the 
Titles  in  this  system  of  drill,  and  such  regulations  as 
prescribe  their  duties  in  peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  ac- 
quainted with  the  bugle  signals:  and  should, by  prac- 
tice, be  enabled,  if  necessary,  to  sound  them.  This 
know  ledge,  so  necessary  in  general  instruction,  be- 
comes of  vital  importance  on  actual  service  in  the 
field. 


instructi6n  of  the  battalion. 


Instruction  of  Sergeants. 


56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  a  company 
materially  depend  on  the  conduct  and  character  of 
its  sergeants,  they  should  be  selected  with  care,  and 
properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties  appertiiining  to 
their  rnnk. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Company,  and 
the  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  should  likewise  know- 
all  the  details  of  service,  and  the  regulations  prescri- 
bing their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  the  corporals  in  his 
company  those  whom  he  judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to 
the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  sergeants. 


Instruction  of  Corporals. 


59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as  pre- 
scribe their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few 
privates,  who  may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  in- 
struction of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals  is 
intended  principally  to  qualify  them  for  the  instruction 
of  the  privates,  they  should  be  taught  not  only  to  exe- 
cute, but  to  explain  intelligibly  everything  they  may  bo 
required  to  teach. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  15 

Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  coumiaud  caution,  which  is  attention. 

63.  The  preparatory  command,  which  indicates  the 
movement  which  is  to  be  executed. 

.  64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or 
halt,  or,  in  the  mun,ual  of  arms,  the  j>art  of  command 
which  causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  dis- 
tinct, and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of 
men  under  instruction. 

66.  The  command  attention  is  pron<  unced  at  the 
top  of  the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  C(»mmand  of  execution  will  be  pronounced 
in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  couunands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory 
commands  are  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of 
execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  prepai-atory  commands  which,  from  their 
length,  are  difficult  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be 
divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  with  an  ascending  pro- 
gression in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  tone  of  execution  may  be  more  ener- 
getic and  elevated ;  the  divisions  are  indicated  by  a 
hyphen.  The  parts  of  command  which  are  placed  in 
a  parenthesis,  are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE  SECOND. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

General    Rules   and   dirisum    of    the    School    of    the 
Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  tins  school  being  the  individual 
and  progressive  instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  in- 
structor never  requires  a  movement  to  be  executed 
until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation  of  it ;  and  he 
executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he  commands, 
so  as  to  join  example  to  precept.  He  accustoms  the 
recruit  t*take,  by  himself,  the  position  which  is  ex- 
plained— teaches  him  to  rectify  it  only  when  required 
by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that  all  the 
movements  are  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movemeut  should  be  understood  before 
passing  to  another.  After  they  have  been  properly 
executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the 
instructor  bo  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order; 
on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may 
judge  of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the 
end  of  each  part  of  the  lessons,  and  oftener,  if  he 
thinks  proper,  especially  at  the  commencement ;  for 
this  purpose  he  commands  Rest. 

73.  .At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer 
required  to  preserve  immobility,  (»r  to  remain  in  his 
place.  If  the  instructor  wishes  merely  to  relieve  the 
attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place— 
Rest  :  the  soldier  is  then  not  required  to  preserve  his 

(16) 


.<CH   OL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  1.  17 

nmnobility,  but  he  always  keeps  one  of  bis  feet  in  its 
place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the 
instruction,  he  commands — Attention;  at  this  com- 
mand, the  soldier  takes  his  position,  remains  motion- 
less, and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  the.  Soldier  wnll  be  divided  into 
three  parts;  the  fiist,  comprehending  what  ought  to 
be  taught  to  recruits  witliout  arms ;  the  second,  the 
7nanual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings ;  the  third, 
the  principles  of  alignment,  the  march  by  the  front, 
the  different  steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the  prin- 
ciples of  wheeling,  and  those  of  change  of  direction  ; 
also,  long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

76.  Each  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons  as  fol- 
lows : 


•  PART   FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms  ; 
Eyes  right,  left  and  front 

Lesson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3..Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common 
and  quick  time. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  double 
quick  time  and  the  run. 


PART    SECOND. 


Lesson  ).  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  2.  Manual  of  arms 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  lour  times,  and  at  w^ill. 


18  SCHOOL  OF  Tin-:  SOLDIKR-PALT  I. 

Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  aud  by 
rank. 

Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 
Lesson  6.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PART   THIRD. 

Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruc- 
tion in  the  principles  of  the  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march, 
and  the  different  steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  march  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  aud  change  of 
direction. 

Lesson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time,  and 
the  run,  with  arms  and  knipsacks. 

PART  FIRST.  • 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  re- 
cruit at  a  time ;  but  three  or  four  may  bo  united,  when 
the  number  be  great,  compared  with  that  of  the  in- 
structors. In  this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed  in 
a  single  rank;  at  one  pace  from  eiich  other.  In  this 
part,  the  recruits  Avill  be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 

Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as 
the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each 
other  something  less  than  a  right  angle ; 


SCHOOL  <'F  THE  S   LDIEK— PART  I.  19 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness  ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  for- 
ward ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equallj  ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally ; 

The  elbows  near  the  body  ; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front, 
the  little  finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  ; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without 
constraint ; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it ; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking 
the  ground  about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 

Remarks  on  the  Position  of  the  Soldier. 

Heels  on  the  same  line ; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  the  rear  of  the  other, 
the  shoulder  on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back,  or 
the  position  of  the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have 
legs  with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  constraint, 
make  their  heels  touch  while  standing. 

The  feet  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large 
an  anorle  : 


Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than  the 
other;  a  shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if  both  feet 


20      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I. 

be  too  mucli  turned  out,  it  would  uot  be  practicable 
to  ineline'the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  without 
rendering  the  whole  position  unstead}-. 


Knees  extended  icithout  stiffness; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  C(>ustraint  and  fatigue  would 
be  unavoidable. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips ; 

Because,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The 
instructor  will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the  bad 
habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a  side,  or 
of  advancing  a  hip,  particularly  the  right,  when  un- 
der arms.     These  are  defects  he  will  labor  to  correct. 


The  upper  part  of  the  body  inelining  foricard ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the 
reverse,  to  project  the  belly,  and  to  throw  back  the 
shoulders,  when  they  wish  to  h(dd  themselves  erect, 
from  which  result  great  inconveniences  in  marching. 
The  habit  of  inclining  forward  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  is  so  important  to  contract,  that  the  instructor 
must  enforce  it  at  the  beginning,  particularly  with 
recruits  who  have  naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulders  square  : 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the 
line  of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  L  '21 

called  rouud-ohouhkrcd,  not  imconimon  among  re- 
cruits,) the  man  cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his 
piece  with  address.  It  is  important,  then  to  correct 
this  defect,  rnd  necessary  to  that  end  that  the  coat 
should  set  easy  about  the  shoulders  and  arm-])its  ;  but 
in  correcting  this  defect,  the  iustrnct<!r  will  take  care 
that  the  shoulders  be  not  thrown  too  nmch  to  the 
rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project,  and  the 
small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 


The  arms  hanging  naturally,  clhoirs  near  the  body,  the 
palm  of  the  hand  a  little  turned  to  the  front,  the  little 
Jingcr  behind  the  scam  ot  the  pantaloons  ; 

Because,  thes!^  positions  are  equally  important  to 
the  shouldcr-anns,  'dud  to  prevent  the  man  from  occu- 
pying more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a  free 
use  of  the  piece;  they  have,  moreover,  the  advantage 
of  keeping  in  the  shoulders. 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  icithout  rcsiraint  ■ 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position, 
it  would  communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  the  up- 
per part  of  the  body,  embarrass  its  movements,  and 
give  pain  and  fatigue. 


Eyes  direct  to  flic  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  menus  of  maintaining 
the  shoulders  iii  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  in- 
sisted on  and  attained. 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  L 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the 
position  of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach 
him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.  He  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Eyes— Right.    2.  Front. 

81 .  At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  head 
gently,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  coi-ner  of  the  lelt  eye 
in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes  fixed 
on  a  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be 
in,  the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume 
the  direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  be  executed 
by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  the 
movement  of  the  head  does  not  derange  the  square- 
ness of  the  shoulders,  which  will  happen  if  th£  move- 
ment of  the  former  be  too  sudden. 

85.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  recruit  to 
pass  from  the  state  of  attention  to  that  of  ease,  he 
will  coumiand : 

Rest: 

80.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual  position, 
the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.  SqUAD. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his  attesn- 
tioii :  at  the   second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed 

f.'^' -ition  and  steadiness. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  1. 


Lesson  II. 
Facings. 

88.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed 
in  one  time,  or  pause.     The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Squad.    2.  A't^/<t  (or /f/O— Face. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raifC  the  right  foot 
slightly,  turn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little, 
and  then  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the 
left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  be  exe 
cuted  in  two  times,  or  pauses.  The  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Squad.    2.  About-face. 

91.  (First  time.)  At  ihe  word  about,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the 
front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  <»p- 
posite  to,  and  full  three  inches  from,  the  left  heel,  the 
ieet  square  to  each  other. 

92.  (Second  time.)  At  the  word /are,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  extend 
the  hams,  face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  ot  the  left. 

93.  The  instructor  will  lake  care  that  these  mo 
tions  do  uot  derange  the  position  of  the  body 


Ii4  SCflUOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I. 

-Lesson  III.     " 

Principles  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  len^ffli  of  the  tlircct  step,  or  p;ieo  in  com- 
mon time,  will  be  twenty-eight  iiielies,  reckoning  from 
heel  to  heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the  rate  of  ninety  in 
u  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in 
his  position,  will  explain  to  him  the  princi])le  and 
mechanism  of  this  step — placing  himself  six  or  seven 
paces  from,  and  facing  to,  the  recruit.  He  will  him- 
self execute  slowly  the  step  lathe  way  of  illustration, 
and  then  command  : 

].  Sqnnd,  fonrard.     2.   Comniun  time. 
3.  March. 

90.  At  the  first,  command,  the  recruit  will  throw 
the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg,  without  bend- 
ing the  left  knee. 

if7.  At  the  thiul  command,  he  will  smartly,  but 
without  a  jerk,  carry  strsiight  forward  the  leit  foot 
twenty-eight  inches  from  th.e  right,  the  sole  near  the 
ground,  tiie  h.iui  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed, 
ynd,  as  also  the  knee,  slighlly  turned  out;  he  will,  at 
the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward, 
and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at 
the  distance  where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right  when 
the  weight  of  the  body  is  brcjught  forward,  the  wh((le 
of  which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  ft.ot.  The  re- 
cruit will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot 
and  plant  it  a,s  above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  L      Ho 

from  the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to 
march  without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  the  one 
against  the  other,  without  turning  the  shoulders,  and 
preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

9-^.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
march,  he  will  couimand: 


1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 


9$>.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the 
ground,  the  foot  in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up,  and 
planted  by  the  side  of  the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to 
time,  to  the  recruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  giving 
the  command  one  at  the  iustant  of  raising  a  foot,  and 
ttco  tit  the  i.istant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing 
the  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  minute.  This  me- 
thod will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the 
mind  the  two  motions  into  which  the  step  is  natural- 
ly divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the 
first  and  second  parts  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 
As  soon  as  tlie  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has 
become  established  in  the  principles  of  shouldered 
arms,  and  in  the  mechanism,  length  and  swiftness  of 
the  step  in  common  time,  he  will  be  practised  only  in 
quick  time,  the  double  quick  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are 
the  same  as  for  ctmimon  time,  but  i*-s  swiftness  is  at 
the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 


26      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER -PART  I. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in 
quick  time,  will  command: 

1.  Squad,  fonrard.     2.  March, 

Lesson  IV. 

Principles  of  the  Douhle   Quick  Stej). 


104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty- 
three  inches,  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hun 
dred  and  sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 

lOo.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits 
the  .principles  and  mechanisui  of  the  double  quick 
step,  will  command : 

1.  Douhle  quick  step.     2.  MARCH. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  raise 
his  hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed, 
the  nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the 
front  his  left  leg  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the  knee 
the  greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between 
the  knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed  ; 
he  will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former  position ; 
with  the  right  leg  he  will  execute  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  movement 

he  legs  will  b  e  continued  until  the  command: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  L  2^ 


1.  Sciuad.    2.  Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will 
bring  the  foot  which  is  raised  by  tlie  side  of  the 
other,  and  dropping  at  the  same  time  his  hands  by 
his  side,  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier  with- 
out arms. 

109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight 
paces  from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the 
cadence  by  the  commands,  one  and  tico,  given  alter- 
nately at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be  brought  to 
the  groimd,  which  at  first  will  be  in  common  time, 
but  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in 
the  principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Squad,  foricard.     2.  Double  quick. 

3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw 
the  weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  sec<tnd  command,  he  will  place  his 
arms  as  indicated  No.  106. 

113.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward 
the  left  foot,  the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee  some- 
what raised — will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe  first, 
thirty-three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right 
f()(»t  will  then  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  left.  This  alternate  movement  of  the  le^s 
will  take  place  by  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on 
the  foot  that  is  planted,  and  by  allowing  a  natural, 
oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms.' 


.2S  SCHOOL  OF  THE  t^OLDlER— PART  H. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with 
dittereut  degrees  of  sviftness.  Under  urgent  cir- 
cumstances the  cadence  of  this  step  may  be  increas- 
ed to  one  hundred  and  eighty  per  miimte.  At  this 
rate  a  distance  of  four  thousand  yards  would  be  pass- 
ed over  in  about  twenty-live  minutes. 

115.  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double 
quick  step,  the  (»nly  difference  consisting  in  a  greater 
degree  of  swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double 
quick  time,  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe 
as  much  as  possible  through  the  uose,  keeping  the 
mouth  closed.  Experience  has  proved  that,  by  con- 
forming to  this  principle,  a  man  can  pass  over  a 
umch  longer  distance,  and  with  less  fatigue. 


PART  SECOND- 


GENERAL   RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this 
second  part  until  tliey  shall  be  well  established  in  the 
position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  manner  of  nuirchiiig 
at  the  ditterent  steps. 

119.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will 
place  in  the  same  rank,  elbow  to  <'lbow,  and  instruct 
them  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms,  as  follows: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 


LESSON  I. 
Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the 
first  le-sson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause 
hiui  to  bend  the  ri^ht  arm  slightly,  and  place  the 
piece  in  it,  in  the  following  manner  : 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand— the  barrel  near- 
ly vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder 
—the  guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at 
its  full  length  near  the  body ;  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers 
closed  together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock 
just  under  the  cock,  which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  de- 
fects in  the  conformation  of  the  shoulders,  breast  and 
hips.  These  the  instructor  will  labor  to  correct  in 
the  lessons  without  arms,  and  afterwards,  by  steady 
endeavors,  so  that  the  appearance  of  the  pieces,  in  the 
same  Hue,  may  be  uniform,  and  this  without  con- 
straint to  the  men  in  their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark 
that  recruits,  on  first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  de- 
range their  position  by  lowering  the  right  shoulder 
and  the  right  hand,  or  by  siuking  the  hip  and  spread- 
ing out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults 
by  coutinually  rectifying  the  position  ;  he  will  some- 
times take  away  the  piece  to  rep^   :•   i.  the  better ;  he 


30  SCHOOL  OF  THE  f  OLDn':R— PART  H. 

will  avoid  fatiguiiifr  the  recruits  too  much  in  thf.  be- 
ginning, but  labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  position 
80  natural  and  easy  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a  long 
time  without  fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care 
that  the  piece,  at  the  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too 
high  nor  too  low:  if  too  high,  the  right  elbow  would 
spread  out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space 
in  his  rank,  and  the  piece  be  made  to  waver  ;  if  too 
low,  the  files  would  be  too  much  closed,  the  soldier 
would  not  have  the  necessary  space  to  handle  his 
piece  with  facility,  the  right  arm  would  become  too 
much  fatigued,  and  would  draw  down  the  shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  to  be  repeated  the  movements  of 
eyes  right,  left,  and  front,  and  the  facings. 


LESSON  II. 


Ma?mal  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  ^irms  will  be  taught  to  four 
men,  placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow, 
and  afterwards  in  two  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time 
(or  pause;,  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into  mo- 
tions, the  better  to  make  known  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  for  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  the 
manual  of  arms,  with  the  exception  herein  indicated, 
is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute ;  but,  in  or- 
der not  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor  will, 
at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  the  execution  of 
the  motions,  without  requiring  a  nice  observance  of 


■^ 


S^^ipf'J"^ 


aCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.      31 

the  cadence,  to  which  he  will  bring  the  recruits  pro- 
gressively, and  after  they  shall  have  become  a  little 
familiarized  with  the  handling  of  the  piece. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to 
the  rammer,  and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the 
bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed, 
nor  even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be 
subjected  to  that  cadence.  The  instructor  will,  how- 
ever, labor  to  cause  these  motions  to  be  executed 
with  promptness,  and,  above  all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  connnand  will  decide 
the  brisk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time 
(or  pause).  The  commands  tico,  three  and  four,  will 
decide  the  brisk  executi<»n  of  the  other  moti(»ns.  As 
soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  c<miprehend  the  posi- 
tions of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  be 
taught  to  execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its 
different  motions;  the  mechanism  of  the  time  will 
nevertheless  be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a  perfect 
use  of  the  ])iece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slurring 
over,  either  of  the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  fol- 
lowing progression :     The  instructor  will  con.mand  : 


Support — A-RMS.      , 
One  time  and  three  motions. 


133.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the 
right  hand,  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  and  between 
the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear  ;  seize  the  piece  with 


I 
32      SCHOOL  OF  THE  POLDIER— PART  II. 

the  left  hand  at  tlie  lower  band,  raise  this  hand  as 
high  as  the  chin,  an.l  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand  four  inches  below  the  cock. 

134.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front;  carry  the  piece  to 
the  left  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm  extended  on 
the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock  ; 
support  the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm,  the  left 
hand  resting  on  the  right  breast. 

135.  (Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  b}'  the 
side. 

13<5.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command : 

Rest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up 
smartly  the  right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  piece 
Csmall  of  the  stock  j,  when  they  will  not  be  required 
to  preserve  silence,  or  steadiness  of  position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits 
to  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  stea- 
diness, he  will  command ; 

1.  Attention.     2.    Squad. 

139.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  sujjpoit  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 


Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

140.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the 
light  hand  under  and  against  the  left  fore-arm  ;  seize 
it  with  the  left  hand  at  tlie  lower  band,  the  thumb 
extended  ;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from  the  shoul- 
der, the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

141.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertical- 
ly to  the  right  shoulder  with  both  hands,  the  rammer 
to  the  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so 
as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, slip  the  left  hantl  to  the  height  of  the  shoul- 
der, the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm 
nearly  straight. 

142.  (Third  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Present— Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

143.  (First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring 
the  piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the 
rammer  to  the  front;  at  the  same  time  seize  the 
piece  with  the  left  hand  half-way  between  the  guide 
sight  and  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizontal 
and  resting  against  the  body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the 
elbow. 

144.  (Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 


34  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— I'ART  II. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  change  the  position  of  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-linger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  tlie 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  join- 
ed, the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

146.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Order— Arms. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 


147.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with 
the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand:  loosen 
the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece  with  the 
left,  reseize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  above  the 
lower  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the 
butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right 
hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand 
by  the  side. 

'  148.  (Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through 
the  right  hand  to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly  the 
fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  order  arms. 

140.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  extended  along  the  stock ;  the  other 


■  ■] 
• 

1 

m 

>i 

m     1 

i 

L ,                                      .              "            ■       1 

1 
SCH  )0L  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  35 

fingers  extended  and  joined ;  the  muzzle  about  two 
inches  from  the  right  shoulder  ;  the  rammer  in  front; 
the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt,  against,  and  in  a  line 
with,  the  toe  uf  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendi- 
cular. 

150.  "When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command  : 

Rest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to 
pass  from  this  position  tothat  of  silence  and  steadi- 
ness, he  will  command :    % 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

Shoulder  —Arms. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

154.  (First  motion.)  Eaise  the  piece  vertically 
with  the  right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast, 
and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the 
body ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the 
right,  and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the 
piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger embracing  the  guard ;  press  the  pifce  against 
the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 


3G  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  IL 

155.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  loft  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Load  in  nine  times. 

1.  Load.* 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

156.  (First  motion.)  Same  as  first  position  of 
present  arms  No.  143. 

(Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  to  the  left  side 
with  the  left  hand — butt  upon  the  ground — barrel  to 
the  front — piece  inclined  to  the  right  and  front  rest- 
ing along  the  left  thigh,  muzzle  six  inches  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  body — right  hand  grasping  the 
piece  just  below  the  uppea  band,  and  the  left  hand 
extending  upon  the  pieces 

(  Third  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
at  the  muzzle  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  car- 
tridge box. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next 
two  fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  ihe  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cart- 
ridge upright  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fin- 
gers, near  the  top  ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of 
and  near  the  muzzle — the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

*Wheuever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed  the 
instructor  will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the 
front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  c^OLDI£R— PART  II.  37 

4.  CAaro-c— Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel;  di.sen- 
gnge  the  ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  haudaud 
the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  loft;  insert  it 
into  the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press 
it  down  with  the  right  thuuib;  seize  the  head  of  the 
rammer  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right 
hand,  the  other  fingers  closed,  the  elbows  near  the 
body. 

5.  Draw — Raimmer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

\(}().  {First  motion.)  mif  draw  the  rammer  by 
extending  the  right  arm;  steady  it  in  this  position 
with  the  left  thumb;  seize  the  rammer  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  the  thumb 
under  and  finger  over  the  rammer;  fingers  extended, 
palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

161.  {Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the 
pipes  by  extending  the  arm  ;  the  raimner  in  prolon- 
gation of  the  pipes,  palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

162.  (Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer  by  clos- 
ing the  fingers,  the  little  end  passing  near  the  left 
shoulder,  turning  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front; 
steady  it  by  extending  the  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand;  place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the  ball,  the 
rammer  in  prolongation  of  the  barrel. 

6.  jRam— Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one   motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and 
steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  11 

hand;  seize  the  raniuier  at  the  small  end  ^^•ith  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of 
the  hand  to  the  front;  press  the  ball  home,  the  el- 
bows near  the  body. 

7.  Return — EAMMliR. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

164.  (First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  half-way 
out,  and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb; 
grasp  it  near  the  muzsle  with  the  right  hand,  the 
thumb  under,  and  the  forefinger  above  the  rammer, 
the  fingers  extended ;  gtear  the  rammer  from  the 
bore  by  extending  the  arm,  the  palm  to  the  front,  the 
rammer  in  the  prolongation  of  the  barrel. 

165.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head 
passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  the  fingers  closed,  the 
rammer  held  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger — 
nails  to  the  front;  insert  the  rammer,  until  the  hand 
reaches  the  muzzle. 

166.  {Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  by 
placing  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head 
of  the  rammer  ;  extend  the  left  hand  down  the  piece 
without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Prime.* 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

167.  {First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise  the 
piece  till  the   hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the 

*If  Maynard's  primer  be  used,  the  command  will  he,  load  in 


! 

1 

j 

/If?                      ' 

\ 
i 

SCH'K'L  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  39 

small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand ;  half  face  to 
the  right ;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot  be- 
hind and  at  right  angles  with  the  left;  the  hollow  of 
the  right  foot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  hand 
down  to  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  along  the  stock, 
the  left  elbow  against  the  body ;  bring  the  piece  to 
the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore-arm — the 
small  of  the  st(»ck  against  the  body  and  two  inches 
below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  muz- 
zle on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

168.  (Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb 
of  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  supported  against  the 
guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock— remove  the  old  cap 
with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the 
thunib  and  fore-finger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap 
from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it 
down  with  the  thumb ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand. 


9.  Shoulder — ARMS. 
One  time  and  tico   motions. 


169.  {First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder  and  support  it  therewith  the  left  hand, face 

eight  times,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be,  shoulder  arms, 
and  executed  from  return  rammer,  in  one  time  and  two  mo- 
tions, as  follows  : 

{First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take 
the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

{Second  motion.)    Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


40  SCHOOL  rP  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

to  the  front;  hr'in^  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  and 
on  a  line  with  the  left;  grasp  the  fiiece  vvirh  the  right 
hand  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  s/ioultlfr  arms. 

170.  (Second  motion.)     Drop  tlie  left  hand  (juickly 
by  the  side. 


Ready. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

171.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
the  right  hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the 
left  heel ;  carry  the  right  f(»(tt  to  the  rear,  and  place 
it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite 
to,  and  against  the  left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the 
left  hfind  at  the  lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly 
from  the  shoulder. 

172.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  left  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore- 
arm, the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as 
the  eye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side  ;  place  at  the 
same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock, 
the  other  fingers  under  and  against  Ihe  guard. 

173.  (  Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at 
the  small  of  the  stock  without  deranging  the  position 
of  the  butt. 


school  of  the  soldier— part  h.    41 
Alm. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support 
the  butt  against  the  right  shoulder ;  the  left  elbow 
down,  the  right  as  high  as  the  shoulder;  incline  the 
head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may  perceive 
quickly,  the  notch  of  the  haussee,  the  front  sight,  and 
the  object  aimed  at ;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right 
thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  fore-finger  on 
the  trigger. 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  tw^>  ranks  to  ex- 
ecute the  firings,  the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a  little 
less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to  facilitate  the  aim  of 
the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry 
the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  to- 
wards the  left  heel  of  the  mau  next  on  the  right,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 

Fire. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire, 
without  lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in 
this  position. 

178.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe  when 
the  men  fire,  that  they  aim  at  some  distinct  object,  and 
that  the  barrel  be  so  directed, that  the  line  of  fire  and 

4* 


42      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART   . 

the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same  vertical  plane.  They 
will  often  cause  the  firiyg  to  be  executed  on  ground 
of  different  inclinations,  in  order  to  accustom  the  men 
to  fire  at  objects  either  above  or  below  them. 


Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 


179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the 
same  time  ftice  to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of  load 
as  indicated.No.  156.  Each  rear  rank  man  will  bring 
his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  loading  to  be  contirmed  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  No.  15G  and  follow- 
ing. 

181.  It,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish 
the  recruits  to  reload,  he  will  command : 


Shoulder-^  Arms  . 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand 
and  resume  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  at  the  same 
time  face  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and 
bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  com- 
mand ^rc,  the  instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  position 
of  aim,  will  command: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL  43 

Recover — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  fiistpart  of  the  command,  withdraw  the 
finger  from  the  trigger  ;  at  the  command  arms,  retake 
the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  oi  ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring 
them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb 
upon  the  cock,  the  fore-fini^er  on  the  trigger,  half-cock, 
and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 
At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the  piece  briskly  to 
the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

188.  (First,  second,  and  third  motions.)  Same  as  in 
first,  second  and  third  motions  in  the  first  time  of  load- 
ing except  in  the  third  motion  the  right  hand  is  car- 
ried to  the  bayonet,  grasping  it,  with  the  little  finger  up. 

]  89.  (Fourth  motion.)  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the 
scabbard,  fix  it,  seize  the  piece  with  the  right  baud  at 


44      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  H. 

the  muzzle,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the  barrel,  arm 
extended. 

Shoulder — ARMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

190.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  and  place  it  against  the  right  sh(»ulder,  the  ram- 
mer to  the  front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right  arm 
nearly  extended. 

191.  (Second  motion  )  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand 
by  ttie  side. 

192  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  if  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  give  the 
command : 

Fix  Bayonet, 

when  the  pieces  will  be  brought  to  the  left  side  at  one 
motion,  and  held  as  prescribed  in  No.  188.  At  the 
sec(»nd  motion  the  bayonets  will  be  fixed  as  in  No. 
189;  immediately  resume  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

Charge— Bay  OSET. 

One  time  and  tico  inotions. 

193.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
the  right  hand  and  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  oppo- 
site to,  and  three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet 
square ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the 
left  hand  a  little  above  the  lower  band. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL  45 

194.  {Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  body  ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the 
same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  sup- 
ported against  the  hip  ;  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as 
high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — ARMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  (First  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly 
with  the  left  hand  in  fticingto  the  front,  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  turn  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the  left 
hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand 
nearly  extended. 

196  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly 
by  the  side. 

Trail — ARMS. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

,  197.  (First  motion.)     The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  order  arms. 

198.  (Second motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly 
to  the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches 
from  the  ground.  The  right  hand  supported  at  the 
hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men  may 
not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front 
rank.  ^ 


46      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

199.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  per- 
pendicularly in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear 
of  the  barrel ;  at  the  command  arms,  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder  from  the  position  of 
order  arms. 

Unfz— Bayonet. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

200.  (First  and  second  motions.)  Same  as  in  fix 
bayonet. 

201.  (Third  motion.).  Same  as  in  fix  bayonet,  ex- 
cept turn  the  bayonet  clasp  with  the  right  thumb, 
grasp  the  shank  of  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand, 
palm  under  thumb  and  fingers  extended  well  at  the 
blade  of  the  bayonet. 

202.  (Fourth  motion  )  "Wrench  off  the  bayonet,  re- 
turn it  to  the  scabbard,  grasp  the  piece  at  the  upper 
band  with  the  right  hand,  lower  the  left  hand  along 
the  barrel,  the  arm  extended  without  depressing  the 
shoulder. 


■# 


4-7. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  H.      47 

Shoulder  —Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

203.  (First  and  second  motions.)  Same  as  from^z 
bayonet  Nos.  ]9U  and  191. 

Secure — ARMS. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

•204.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  support  arms,  No.  133,  except  with  the  right  hand 
seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front;  bring  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  hand  at 
the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and  ex- 
tended on  the  rammer  ;  the  piece  erect  and  detached 
from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  against  the  piece. 

206.  (Third  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it 
under  the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammed  to  prevent  it 
from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the 
hip,  the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  by  the 
side. 


48  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  H. 

Shoulder — ARMS. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

207.  {First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  aud  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of 
the  stock.  The  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the 
shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arm 
along  the  piece. 

208.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  mo- 
tion of  shoulder  arms  from  a  suppoit. 

209.  (Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  mo- 
tion of  shoulder  arms  from  a  support. 


Right  Shoulder  shift— Ar^IS. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

210.  (First  motion.)  Detach  ^he  piece  perpendicu- 
larly from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize 
it  with  the  le^  between  the  lower  band  and  the  guide- 
sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder  and  four  inches  fi'om  it ;  place,  at  the 
same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  be- 
tween the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two  fingers  un- 
der the  butt  plate. 

211.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  raise  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand,  the  lock-plate  upwards;  let  fall, 
at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


/f-8. 


ZJt. 


X- 


i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  H.  49 

Shoulder — ARMS. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

212.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicu- 
larly by  extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the 
rammer  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide 
sight. 

213.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right 
hand,  which  will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  low- 
er the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  slide  up 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers 
extended  and  closed.     Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor 
will  sometimes  cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right 

ulder.     To  this  effect  he  will  command  : 

Right  Shoulder  shift — ARMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  below  and  near  the  left  fore-arm,  place  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between 
the  first  two  fingers. 

216.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards,  carry  it  to  the  right 
shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the  muz- 
zle elevated  ;  hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and  place 
the  right  hand  upon  the  butt  as  is  prescribed  No.  210, 
and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


50  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

217.  {First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  shoulder  arms,  No.  212. 

218.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  opposite  the  left 
shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  <»f  the  stock, 
place  the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast  as  is 
prescribed  No.  134,  and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the 
side. 


Aryns— At  will. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure 
on  either  shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle 
elevated. 

Shoulder— ARms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed 
on  the  ground,  ho  will  command: 


.-=  '7, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL  51 


Ground — ARMS. 


One  time  and  two  motions. 

222.  (First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  seize  the 
cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  ad- 
vance the  left  foot,  the  heel  opposite  the  lower  band  ; 
lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with  the  right  hand,  the 
toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  the  right  toe,  the  knees 
slightly  bent,  the  right  heel  raised. 

223.  (Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot 
by  the  side  of  the  right,  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the 
left  hand,  and  drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 


Raise — ARMS. 


One  time  and  tico  motions. 

224.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with 
the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left  foot  op- 
posite the  lower  band,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand.  . 

225.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece,  bringing 
the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  light ;  turn  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  at  the 
same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand, 
and  drop  this  hand  by  the  side. 


52  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  with  bay- 
onet in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause 
an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  command : 


Inspection — ARMS. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 


(First  and  Second  motions.)  Same  as  in^x  bayonet 
No.  192,  except  that  the  left  hand  remains  at  the  muz- 
zle,, and  the  rammer  head  is  seized  between  the  thumb 
and  forefinger,  as  in  draw  rammer. 

227.  {Third  motion.)  Spring  rammer  as  prescribed 
in  loading ;  lower  the  left  hand  along  the  piece  to  full 
extent  of  arm,  grasping  the  piece  at  the  muzzle  band 
with  right  hand. 

228.  (Fourth  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  position 
of  order  arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession 
the  piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of 
the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  readies  him,  will 
raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it 
with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide-sight, 
the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the 
chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye  ;  the  instructor 
will  take  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and, 
after  inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the  recruit  who 
will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace 
it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  U.  53 


230.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him, 
each  recruit  will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the 
command  inspection  arms,  return  the  rammer,  and  re- 
sume the  position  of  Ordered  arms. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor 
should  merely  wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he 
will  command : 

Fix— Bayonet. 

232.  Take  the  position  indicated  No.  192,  fix-bay- 
onets as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately  resume 
the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing, 
to  ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged, 
he  will  command :    . 

Spring— BaMMERS. 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been  ex- 
plained above,  and  immediately  retake  the  position  of 
ordered  arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can 
take  the  rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the 
barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to  make  it  ring  in  the 
barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him, 
will  return  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 


m 


\ 

54     SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER- PART  H. 

Remarks  on  tJie  Manual  of  Arms. 

237.  The  manual  of  arms  frequently  distorts  the 
persons  of  recruits  before  they  Jicquire  ease  and  con- 
fidence in  the  several  positions.  The  instructor  will 
therefore  frequently  recur  to  elementary  principles  in 
the  course  of  the  lessons. 

238.  Recruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  curve  the 
sides  and  back,  and  to  derange  the  shoulders,  especially 
in  loading.  Consequently,  the  instructor  will  not 
cause  them  to  dwell  too  long,  at  a  time,  in  one  posi- 
tion. 

239.  When,  after  some  days  of  exercise  in  the  man- 
ual of  arms,  the  four  men  shall  be  well  established  in 
their  use,  the  instructor  will  always  terminate  the  les- 
son by  marching  the  men  for  some  time  in  one  rank, 
and  at  one  pace  apart,  in  common  and  quick  time,  in 
order  to  confirm  them  more  and  more  in  the  mechan- 
ism of  the  step;  he  will  also  teach  them  to  mark  time 
and  to  change  step,  which  will  be  executed  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner. 

To  Mark   Time. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Mark  Time.     2.  March. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  a  fi)ot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  re- 
cruits will  make  a  semblance  of  marching,  by  bring- 
ing the  heels  by  the  side  of  each  other,  and  observ- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  S   LDIER— PART  II,  55 

ing  the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  raising  each  foot  alter- 
nately without  advancing. 

242.  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  to  be  re- 
sumed, will  command  : 

1.  Forward .     2.  March. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
as  prescribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

].  Change  step.    2.  March. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground , 
bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that 
which  is  in  front,  and  step  oflf  again  with  the  foot 
which  was  in  front. 

To  march  backwards. 

246.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march 
backwards,  will  command ; 

1.  Squad  backward,     2.  MARCH. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step 
off  smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the 
rear,  reckoning,  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on  with  the 


56  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 

feet  iu  succession  till  the  command  ]i(ilt,  which  will 
always  be  preceded  by  the  caution  squad.  The  men 
will  halt  at  this  command,  and  bring  back  the  foot  iu 
front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

248.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  le- 
cruits  march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect 
position  of  the  body  and  the  piece  be  not  deranged. 


LESSON  III. 
To  load  in  four  times. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  re- 
cruits to  load  at  will,  and  to  cause  them  to  distinguish 
the  times  which  require  the  gieatest  regularity  and  at- 
tention, such  as  charge  cartridge,  ram  cartridge,  and 
-prime.     It  will  be  divided  as  follows : 

251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of 
the  command;  the  three  others  at  the  commands ^fcr;, 
three  nwAfour. 

The  instriu;tor  will  command  : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.     2.  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  to  charge  <  ar- 
tridge. 

Two. 

253.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 


schjol  of  the  soldier— part  ir.  57 

Three. 

254.  Execute  the  time  to  iucliule  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  times  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  ivill. 

256.  The  iustructor  will  next  teach  loarding  at  will, 
which  will  be  executed  as  loadiug  in  four  times,  but 
continued,  and  without  resting  on  either  of  the  times. 
He  will  command : 

1.  Load  at  icill.     2.  LoAD. 

*257,  The  iustructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by- 
degrees,  to  load  with  the  greatest  possible  prompti- 
tude, each  without  regulating  himself  by  his  neighbor, 
and  above  all  without  waiting  for  him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129,  is  not  appli- 
cable to  loading  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 

Lesson  IV. 
Firi7is;s. 


259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be 
executed  as  follows : 


58  SCFIOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 

The  direct  Fire. 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  com- 
mands : 

1.  Yire   by  squad.     2.    Squad.     3.    Ready      4.  AlM. 
5.  Fire,    6.  Load. 

261 .  These  several  commands  will  be  executed  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the 
third  couiTnand,  the  men  will  come  to  the  position  of 
ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the  fourth  they 
will  aim  according  to  the  rank  in  which  each  may 
find  himself,  placed,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining  for- 
ward a  little  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that 
their  pieces  may  reach  as  much  beyond  the  front  rank 
as  possible. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their 
pieces  and  return  immediately  to  the  position  of 
ready. 

263  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  commands : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

264.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease, 
he  will  command : 

Cease  firing. 

265.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing, 
but  will  load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and  afterwards 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  H.  59 

Oblique    Firing. 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the 
right  and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the 
direct  fire,  with  this  single  difference — the  command 
aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or 
left  oblique. 


Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire 
to  the  right. 

267  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will 
exeecute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionery  command,  right  oblique,  the 
two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  rank  man  will 
aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  the  feet ;  each  rear 
rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  eight 
inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the 
right  of  his  file  leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  lit- 
tle the  left  knee.  , 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire 
to  the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command  left  oblique,  the  two 
ranks  will  throw  back  the  left  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

27 J.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take 
aim  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet;  each  man 


60  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 

in  the  rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on 
the  right  of  his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  inclining 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  lit- 
tle the  right  knee. 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men 
of  each  rank  will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  direct  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  men  bringing 
back  the  foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  the 
side  of  the  other.  Each  man  will  continue  to  load  as 
if  isolated. 

To  fire  by  file. 


273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  the  two 
ranks,  the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  and 
without  regulating  on  each  other,  except  for  the  first 
fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

].     Fire  hij  file.    2.     Sqnad.     3.     Ready.     4.  Com-         ^ 

MENCE   FIRING. 

/ 

275.  At  the  third  ccnnifland,  the  two  ranks  will  take 
the  position  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right 
will  aim  and  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  wilj 
take  the  position  indicated  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces 
briskly  and  fire  a  second  time  ;  reload  and  fire  agiiin, 
and  so  on  in  continuation 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim,  at  the  instant  the  first 
brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  will  conform  in  all 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL  61 

respects  to  that  which  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank 
men  will  not  be  required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  po- 
sition of  ready,  and  continue  the  fire. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease,  he 
will  command : 

Cease — Firing. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing. 
If  they  have  fired  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  bring 
them  to  a  shoulder;  if  at  the  position  of  rcarft/,  they 
will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the  position 
of  aim,  they  will  bring  down  their  pieces,  half-cock, 
and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  by  Rank. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  eu- 
tii'e  rank,  alternately. 

.    284.  The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.      2.  Squad.      3.  Eeady.      4.  Rear 
rank.    5.  AiM.    6.  FiRE.     7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will 
take  the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire. 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will 
execute  that  which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire,  and  afterward  take  the  position  of  ready. 


62  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  H. 

287.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of 
the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

L  Front  rank.     2.  AiM.     3.  FiRE.     4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  rear 
rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  Tear  rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from 
rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to  cease, 
when  he  will  command,  cease  firing,  w-hich  will  be  ex- 
ecuted as  heretofore  prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 
To  fire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  supposed 
loaded  and  drawn  up  in  one  rank.  The  instruction 
will  be  given  to  each  man  individually,  without  times 
or  motions,  and  in  the  followii)g  manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  command: 

I         FIRE   AND    LOAD    KNEELING. 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of 
the  squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ; 
then  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the 
right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient 
for  placing  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bend- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL  63 

ing  the  left  leg;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the 
ground  ;  lower  the  piece,  the  left  fore-arm  supported 
upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side,  the  right  hand  on 
the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right 
thigh,  the  left  hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the 
lower  band. 

293.  He  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  left 
around  the  knee  supported  on  the  ground,  until  this 
leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  left 
foot,  and  thus  seat  himself  comfortably  on  the  right 
heel. 

294.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  sup- 
port it  with  the  left,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band, 
the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near  the  knee  ; 
seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb,  the  forefinger  under 
the  guard,  cock  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the 
stock ;  briu'i,  the  piece  to  the  shoulder,  aim  andjire. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and 
support  it  with  the  left  hand,  the  butt  resting  against 
the  right  thigh ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear  risking  on 
the  knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  the  butt  resting  on  the 
ground ;  in  this  position  support  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  draw  cartridge  with  the 
right  and  load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  neces- 
sary, with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with 
the  left  hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper  hand  ;  seize 
it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  band  at  the  small  of 
the  stock  ;  turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost  and 
nearly  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left 
thigh ;  half-cock,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  rise, 
and  return  to  the  ranks. 


64  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 

297.  The  second  in  an  will  then  be  tan<Tht  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  f(»r  the  first,  and  so  on  through  the 
remainder  of  the  squad, 

t,Tofirc  and  load  lying. 

298.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank 
and  loaded  ;  the  instruction  will  be  given  individually 
and  without  times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command  : 


FIRE   AND   LOAD   LYING. 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ;  he  will 
then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on  both  knees, 
and  place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his  belly.  In 
this  position  he  will  support  the  piece  nearly  horizon- 
tal with  the  left  hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band, 
the  butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow^  resting  on 
the  ground,  the  barrel  uppermost ;  cock  the  piece  with 
the  right  hand,  and  carry  this  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock;  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  press  the  butt 
against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on  both  elbows,  aim 
and  j^  re. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down 
and  turn  upon  his  left  side,  still  resting  on  his  left 
elbow;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite 
his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on  the  ground  ;  take 
out  a  cartridge  with  the  right  hand  ;  seize  the  small  of 
the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  the 
thumb  and  two  first  fingers  ;  he  will  then  throw  himself 


i<S. 

T'/s. 

* 

£M 

1 
1 

4 

< 

t?;.     ^,::, 

• 

• 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL  65 

on  his  back  still  holding  the  piece  with  both  hands  ; 
carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place  the  butt  between  the 
heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle  elevated.  In  this  po- 
sition, charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer,  ram  cartridge, 
and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again 
upon  his  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  then 
raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn  about,  and  resume 
his  position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  will  be~taught  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  throughout  the 
squad. 

Lesson  VI. 


'Bayonet  Exercise. 


304.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  con- 
fined to  two  movements,  the  guard  against  infantry, 
and  the  guard  against  cavalry.  The  men  will  be 
placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  paces  interval,  and  being 
at  shoulder  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 


I.   Guard  against  Infantry.     2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


305.  (First  motion.)     Make  a  half  face  to  the  right 
turning  on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other  ; 


66  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  U. 

at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly,  and  seize  it 
with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

306.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty 
inches  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  left,  the  knees  slightly  bent,  fho 
weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on  both  legs;  lower 
the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the 
left  elbow  against  the  body ;  seize  the  piece  at  the 
same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  (»f  the 
stock,  the  arms  frilling  naturally,  the  point  of  the  bayo- 
net slightly  elevated. 


Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

307.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  th»^  left  hand,  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left  and  face  to 
the  front. 

1.   Guard  against  cavalry.     2.  GUARD. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


*{08.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  guard  against  in- 
fantry, except  that  the  right  hand  will  be  supported 
against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  height  of 
the  eye,  as  in  charge  bayonet. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  lU.  67 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

309,  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  face  to 
the  front. 

PART   THIRD. 


310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established  in  the 
principles  and  mechanism  of  the  step,  the  position  of  the 
body,  and  the  manual  of  arms,  the  instructor  will  unite 
eight  men,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order 
to  teach  them  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  princi- 
ples of  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the  front, 
the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  wheeling  from 
a  halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change  of  direc- 
tion to  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  place  the  squad 
in  one  rank  elbow  to  elbow,  and  number  the  men  from 
right  to  left. 

Lesson  I. 


311 .  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to 
make  them  comprehend  the  principles  of  alignment ; 


08  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  HI. 

to  this  end,  be  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  right 
flank  to  march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and  having 
aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of  the 
squad  to  move  up,  as  they  may  be  successively  called, 
each  by  his  number,  and  align  themselves  successively 
on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  asdesignated  by  his  number,  will 
turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  the 
first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and  will  march  in  quick 
time  two  paces  forward,  shortening  the  last,  so  as  to 
find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the  new  align- 
ment, which  he  ought  never  to  pass  ;  he  will  next 
move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the 
hams  extended,  to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on 
the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the  head,  the. 
line  of  the  eyes,  or  tliat  of  the  shoulders,  he  may  find 
himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor,  whose  elbow 
he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening  his  own. 

3J3.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  aligned, 
will  command : 


Front. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
and  remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without 
groping  or  jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire 
rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by  the  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  HI.      69 

Right  (or  /e/0— Dress. 


317.  At  this,  the  rank-,  except  the  two  men  placed 
in  advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in 
qtdck  time,  and  place  themselves  on  the  new  line,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front, 
and  facing  the  rank,  will  carefully  observe  that  the 
principles  are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that 
has  served  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  nnmber  of 
the  rank  w^ell  aligned,  will  command  : 


I^ROXT. 


320.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this  or 
that  ^\e  forward  or  back,  designating  eack  by  its  num- 
ber. The  file  or  files  designated,  only,  will  slightly 
turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to  judge  how  much 
they  ought  to  move  up  or  back,  steadily  place  them- 
selves on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
without  a  particular  command  to  that  effect. 

• 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles,  the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little  be- 
yond the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  No.  312,  the  instructor  command- 
ing : 


70  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IIL 

Right  Cor  left)  backward— Dress. 

322.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  ex- 
amine the  position  of  the  men,  and  cause  the  rank  to 
come  to  ordered  arms,  to  prevent  too  much  fatigue, 
and  also  the  danger  and  negligence  at  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  II. 


323.  The  men  having  learned,  the  first  and  second 
parts,  to  march  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and 
to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness,  will  be  ex- 
ercised in  the  third  part  only  in  quick  time,  double 
quick  time,  and  the  run;  the  instruc  or  will  cause 
them  to  execute  successive!}',  at  these  diiferent  gaits,  ■ 
the  march  to  the  front,  the  facing  about  in  marching, 
the  march  by  the  flank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt,  and  in 
marching,  and  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits'that  at 
the  command  march,  they  will  always  move  off  in  quick 
time,  unless  this  command  should  be  preceded  by  that 
of  double  quick. 


To  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front, 
he  will  place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  right  or  the 
left,  according  to  the  side  on  which  he  may  wish  the 
guide  to  be,  and  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  S   LDIER— PART  III.  71 

1.  Squad,  forward      2.   Guide   right   Cor  left). 
3.  March. 

326.  Afc  the  corainaiid  march,  the  rank  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to 
march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders  al- 
ways in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  to  the 
front,  that  the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the 
side  of  the  guide ;  that  they  do  not  open  out  the  left 
elbow,  nor  the  right  arm;  that  they  yield  to  pressure 
coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  com- 
ing from  the  opposite  side  ;  that  they  recover  by  in- 
sensible degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost ; 
that  they  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  mat 
ter  on  which  side  the  guide  may  be  ;  and  if  found  be- 
fore or  behind  the  alignment,  that  the  man  iu  fault  cor- 
rects himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step,  by 
degrees,  almost  insensible. 

3'J3.  Tlie  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to 
comprehend  that  the  alignment  can  only  be  pre- 
served, in  marching,  by  the  regularity  of  the  step,  the 
touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  shoul- 
ders in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction;  that  if,  for 
example,  the  step  of  some  be  longer  than  that  of 
others,  or  if  some  march  faster  than  others,  a  separa- 
tion of  elbows,  and  a  loss  of  the  alignment,  would  be 
inevitable ;  that  if  (it  being  required  that  the  head 
should  be  direct  to  the  front)  they  do  not  strictly  ob- 
serve the  touch  of  elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  for 
an  individual  to  judge  whether  he  marches  abreast 
with  his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether  there  be  not  an 
interval  between  them. 


72  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  111. 

329.  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  step  having  a  ten- 
dency to  make  men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  move- 
ments, the  instructor  will  be  cjureful  to  regulate  the 
cadence  of  this  step,  and  to  habituate  them  to  preserve 
always  the  ei-ectness  of  the  body,  and  the  due  length 
of  the  pace. 

330.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  direct  march,  the  instructor  will  exer- 
cise them  in  marching  obliquely.  The  rank  being  in 
march,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Right  (or  left)  ohliqe.     2.  March. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  the  right  (or  left,)  and  will  then  march 
straight  forward  in  the  new  direction.  As  the  men  no 
longer  touch  elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the  shoul- 
ders of  the  nearest  files,  towards  the  side  to  which 
they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate  their  steps  so  that 
the  shoulders  shall  always  be  behind  that  of  their 
next  neighbor  on  that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  con- 
ceal the  heads  of  the  other  men  in  the  rank.  Besides 
this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same  length  of  pace, 
and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

332.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primi- 
tive direction,  will  commnnd : 

1.  Foncard.    2.  March. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  the  left  (or  right;,  and  all  will  then 
march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  princi- 
ples of  the  direct  nuirch. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  Ul.  73 

To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

334.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  ex- 
plained, have  become  familiar  to  the  recrnits,  and  they 
sliall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the  body, 
the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism,  length,  and 
swiftness  of  the  step,  the  instructor  will  pass  them 
from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the  reverse  ob- 
serving not  to  make  them  march  oqliquely  in  double 
quick  time,  till  they  are  well  established  in  the  cadence 
of  this  step. 

335.  The  scpiad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the 
instructer  will  command : 

1.   Doiihle  quick.     2.  Mauch. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  c.tming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  step  cff  iu  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  en- 
deavor to  follow  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  first 
part  of  this  book,  and  to  preserve  the  alignment. 

337.  When  the  ir.structor  wishes  the  squad  to  re- 
sume the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command: 

1.   Qluick  time.    2.  March. 

338.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
vi'ill  retake  the  step  in  quick  time. 

339.  Th(?  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will 
halt  it  by  tlie  cianraands  and  means  prescribed  Nos.  98 
and  99.  The  command  hah,  will  be  giveu  an  instant 
bef  I'e  the  foot  is  ready  to  be  placed  on  the  ground. 

6* 


74  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

340.  The  squad  being  in  inarch  in  double  quick 
time,  the  instructor  will  occasionallj  cause  it  to  mark 
time  by  the  comniiinds  prescribed  No.  i{40.  The  men 
will  then  mark  double  quick  time,  without  altering  the 
cadence  of  the  step.  He  will  also  cause  them  to  pass 
from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  step,  and  reciprocally, 
conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  330,  and 
following. 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  by  preceding 
the  command  march,  by  double  quick. 

342.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  well 
the  cadence  of  this  step. 


To  face  about  in  marching. 

343.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double        4 
quick  time,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  it 
in  retreat,  he  will  command : 


].  Squad  right  about.     2.  MaRCH. 


344.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  t(>  the  ground,  the 
recruit  will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  aftd  turning 
on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear ;  he  will  then  place  the 
right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the 
left  foot. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IH.  75 

To  march  backwards. 


345.  The  squad  being  at  a  Lalt,  if  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  march  it  iu  the  back  step,  he  will  com- 
ma ud  : 

1    Squad  backward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right.) 
3.  March. 

346.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful 
that  the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should 
only  be  executed  at  shouldered  arms,  the  instructor,  in 
order  not  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much,  and  also  to  pre- 
vent negligence  in  gait  and  position,  will  halt  the 
squad  from  time  to  time,  and  cause  arms  to  be  ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will 
always  carry  their  pieces  on  the  right  shoulder,  or  at  a 
trail.     This  rule  is  general. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried 
at  a  trail,  he  will  give  the  command  trail  arms,  before 
the  command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  contrary,  this 
command  be  not  given,  the  men  will  shift  their  pieces 
to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick.  In 
either  case,  at  the  command  Aa/<,  the  men  will  bring 
their  pieces  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.  This 
rule  is  general. 


SCHOOL  OF  TIIK  SOLDIER— PART  III. 


Lesson  III. 
To  march  hy  the  fanl{. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  con-ectly  aligned, 
the  insti-uctor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  right— Face.      2.  Foricard.      3.  March. 

352.  At  the  last  pai-t  of  the  first  command,  the  rank 
will  face  to  the  right ;  the  even  numbered  men,  after 
facing  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to  the  right  side  of 
the  odd  nnmbered  men,thelatter  standing  fast,  so  that 
when  the  movement  is  executed,  the  men  will  be  formed 
into  files  of  two  men  abreast. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  oft 
smartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  files  keeping  aligned, 
and  preserving  their  intervals. 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed  by 
the,  same  commands,  substituting  the  word  hft,  for 
right,  unAhy  inverse  means;  in  this  case,  the  even 
numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will  stand 
fast,  and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  themselves  on 
their  left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well  instructed  sol- 
dier by  the  side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  the  head  of 
the  rank,  to  reguhite  the  step,  and  to  conduct  him; 
and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit  to  march  always 
elbow^  to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

356.  The  inssrrctor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in  the 
march,  by  the  flank,  the  following  rules : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IIL  77 

That  the  step  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  direct  step  ; 

Because  these  priueiples,  without  which  men,  placed 
elbow  to  elbow,  in  the  same  rank,  cannot  preserve 
unity  and  harmony  of  movement,  are  of  a  more  neces- 
sary observance  in  marching  in  file. 

That  the  head  of  the   man  icho  ifinncdiatcly  precedes, 
covers  the  heads  of  all  irho  are  in  front  ; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each 
man  may  maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  the  file. 

357.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually  five 
or  six  paces  on  the  flank  of  the  rank  marching  in  file, 
to  watch  over  the  execution  of  the  principles  prescribed 
above.  He  will  also  place  himself  sometimes  in  its 
rear,  halt,  and  suflfer  it  to  pass  fifteen  or  twenty  paces, 
the  better  to  see  whether  the  men  cover  each  other 
accurately. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  marching 
by  the  flunk,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  fi-ont,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 


359.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and 
afterwards  no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may  have 
lost  his  distance.  This  prohibition  is  necessary,  to 
habituate  the  men 'to  a  constant  preservation  of  their 
distances. 

360.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by 
facing  to  the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and 


78  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

by  a  face  to  the  right,  if  inarching  by  the  left  flank. 
The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the  same  time  move  quickly 
into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad  again  into 
one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  haTC  become  accustomed  to 
marching  by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  tiiem 
to  change  direction  by  file  ;  for  this  purpose  he  will 
command  : 

1.  By  file  left  (or  right.)    2.  March. 

3G2.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change 
direction  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing  a  small  arc 
of  a  circle,  and  will  then  march  straight  forw.ird  ;  the 
two  men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up  the 
touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which 
the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four 
steps.  Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on 
the  same  spot  where  that  which  |)receded  it  wheeled. 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to 
face  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for 
this  purpose  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  hy  the  right  {or  left)  flank.      2.  MARCH. 

364.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  a 
little  before  either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  re 
emits  will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is  raised 
in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot 
without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step  ;  the  men  will 
double  or  undouble  rapidly. 

365.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank,  the 
squad  should  face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into 
one  rank,  agreeably  to  the  principles  indicated  in  l^o. 
360.    It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is  the  men  who  are 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDH'-.R— PAIIT  HI.  79 

in  rear  who  always  niOTC  up  to  form  into  single  rank, 
and  in  such  manner  as  never  to  invert  the  order  of  the 
numbers  in  the  rank. 

366.  If,  when  the  squad  has  heen  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  instructor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank, 
it  is  the  even  numbers  who  will  double  by  moving  to 
the  right  of  the  odd  numbers  ;  but  if  by  the  right 
flank,  it  is  the  odd  numbers  who  will  double  to  the 
left  of  the  even  numbers.  Observe  the  two  following 
rules  in  the  facings,  viz : 

1.  Never  gain  ground  to  the  front  in  d<iubling. 

2.  Never  reverse  the  order  of  the  numbers  in  un- 
doubling. 

The  front  referred  to,  is  the  original  or  real  front. 
The  numbers  would  be  reversed,  if  in  counting,  begin- 
ning on  the  right  of  the  company,  number  two  should 
call  before  number  one.  These  rules  apply  to  all  fa- 
cings, whether  the  company  be  marching,  or  at  a  halt. 

3G7.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be 
practised  with  pieces  at  a  shoulder  ;  but  the  instructor 
may,  to  give  relief  by  change,  occasionally  order  sup- 
port arms,  and  he  will  require  of  the  recruits  marching 
in  this  position,  as  much  regularity  as  in  the  former. 
The  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time. 

368.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in 
double  quick  time  are  the  same  as  in  quick  time.  The 
instructcu*  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No.  351, 
taking  care  always  to  give  the  command  double  quick 
before  that  of  march. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  ca- 
dence of  the  step. 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direc- 
tion and  the  march  by  the  flank,  to  bo  executed  in 
double  quick  lime,  by  the  same  commands,  and  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles,  as  in  quick  time. 


80  t^CHOOL  OF  THE  SOLD  I  L;R— PART  III. 

371.  Tlie  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  car- 
ried either  on  the  right-shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad 
by  the  flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same  as  in 
two  ranks,  and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  351,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the 
squad  not  to  d(»uble  files. 

375.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  ir.en  do 
not  bend  their  knees  unequally,  which  would  caupe 
them  to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and  also 
to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step  and  their  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be 
executed  in  single  rank.  In  the  changes  of  d'rection, 
the  leading  men  v^'ill  change  direction  without  alternig 
the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step  The  instructor 
will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  tliatin  facing  by 
the  rightorleft  flank  in  marching,  they  will  not  double , 
but  march  in  one  rank. 


LESSON  IT. 


WHEELINGS 


General  j>rmci])les  of  Wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds:  from  halts,  or  on 
fixed  pivots,  and  in  march,  or  moveable  pivots. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  60LDIE11— PART  III.  81 

378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes plnce  in  pass- 
ing a  corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in 
column,  or  from  the  hitter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  phice  in  changes  of 
direction  in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  exe- 
cuted to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot  man  only  turns 
in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  thewheelsin  marching,  the  pivot  takes  steps 
of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad  is 
marchkig  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  clear 
the  wheeling  point,  which  is  necessary,  in  order  that 
the  subdivisions  of  a  column  may  change  directirn 
without  losing  their  distances,  as  will  be  explaiiicd  in 
the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The  man  on  the  w^heeling  flank  Avill  take  tbo 
full  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  or  thirty-three  inches, 
according  to  the  gait. 


Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  afixedpnx'. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  < 
place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to 
conduct  it,  and  then  command  : 


1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.     2.  MARCH. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  raidv  will  stepolf 
with  the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  h^a  1  a 
little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyivs 
of  the  men  to  their  left;  the  pivot-man  will  JEierely 
mark  time  in  gradually  turning  his  body,  in  or  ler  tu 


82  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PAKT  III. 

conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching 
flank  ;  the  man  who  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps 
of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  from  the  first  step  advance 
a  little  the  left  shoulder,  casthis  eyes  from  time  to  time 
along  the  rank,  and  feel  constantly  the  elbow  of  the 
next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

385.  The^ther  man  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the 
next  man  towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  coming 
from  the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  conform  himself 
to  the  marching  flank — shortening  his  step  according 
to  his  approximation  to  the  pivot. 

386.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round 
the  circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  order  to 
cause  the  principles  to  be  the  l)etter  understood,  and 
he  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does  not  break. 

387.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
wheel,  he  will  command  : 

'  1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

389.  At  the  secoiid  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and 
no  man  stir  The  insti-uctor,  going  to  the  flank  oppo- 
site the  pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  <»f  that 
flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  the  rank, 
without  however  <lisplacing  the  pivot,  who  will  C(m- 
form  the  lino  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction.  The  in- 
structor will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two- 
men,  and  the  pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to  con- 
tain the  other  men.     He  will  then  command: 


yCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.      83 

L'ft  (or  right) — Dress. 

390.  At  this,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  two  men  established  as  the  basis,  in  con- 
formity with  the  principles  prescribed. 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  command  Front, 
which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  3J4. 


Re}na?-ks  on  tlic  ininc'iples  of  the  wheel  from 
a  halt, 


392.  Turn  a  little  the  head  towards  the  marching 
fiank,  and  fix -the  eyes  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men 
who  arc  on  that  side  ; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each 
man  to  regulate  the  length  of  his  step  so  as  to  conform 
his  own  movement  to  that  of  the  marching  tlank. 

Touch  lightly   the  clhoio  of  the  next  man  towards  the 
pivot ; 

In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  the  wheel. 

Resist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  sideofthe  marching 
flank ; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,  the  pivot, 
which  ought  to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels  from  a  halt, 
might  be  pushed  out  of  its  place  by  pressure. 


84      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  HL 

Wheeling   in  marcliing,  or   on  a    moveable 
invot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  buA-e  been  brought  to  exe- 
cute well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  taught 
to  wheel  in  marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to 
the  reverse  flank,  (to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide  or 
pivot  flank,)  he  will  command  : 

1.  Tiighi  (or  left)  ichcel.    2.  March. 

395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
rank  is  ye\  four  paces  from  the  wheeling  poi't. 

396.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  th''  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that 
the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain  towards  the  march- 
ing flank  (or  side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  the  side  of 
the  aoiual  pivot;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  mere- 
ly turning  in  his  place,  will  conform  himself  to  the 
movement  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  el- 
bow of  the  next  man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches, 
and  thus  gain  ground  forward  in  describing  a  small 
curve  so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel.  The  mid- 
dle of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon 
as  the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man  who  con- 
ducts the  marching  flank  will  cast  J^is  eyes  on  the 
ground  over  which  he  will  have  to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
connnand : 


SCHr>  L  OF  THE  SOLDIEl!— PART  III.  85 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

398.  The  first  command  will  be  proiiouuceti  when 
four  paces  are  yet  required  to  complete  the  change  of 
direction. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  ofcompleting  the  wheel,  the  man  who  con- 
ducts the  marching  flank  will  direct  himself  straight 
forward  ;  the  pivot  man  and  all  the  rank  will  retake 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head  di- 
rect to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
^  the  guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
in  marching,  will  be  executed  as  follows  :  The  instruc- 
tor will  command  : 

1.  Left  {iw  right)  turn.    2.  March. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank 
is  yet  four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  anarch,  to  be  pronounced  at 
the  instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face 
to  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and  move  forward 
in  the  new  directiou  without  slackening  or  quickening 
the  CTdence,aud  without  shortening  or  lengthening  the 
step.  The  whole  rank  will  promptly  conform  itself  to 
the  new  direction  ;  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  ad- 
vance the  shoulder  o^jposite  to  the  guide,  take  the 
double  quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in  the  new  direction. 


86  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  III. 

turn  the  bead  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side,  in  placing 
himse'f  on  the  alignment  of  the  guide,  from  whom  he 
will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume  the  direct  position 
of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus  arrive  successively 
on  the  alignment. 


Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side 
of  the  guide,  in  double  quick  time. 


403.  When  the  recruits  comprehend  and  execute 
well,  in  quick  time,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  march-, 
ing,  and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  same  movements 
to  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by 
the  same  commands  «and  acconling  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  in  quick  time,  except  that,  the  command 
double  quick  will  precede  that  of  warc/t.  In  wheeling 
while  marching,  the  pivot  man  will  take  steps  of  eleven 
inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide  must 
increase  the  gait  in  order  to  bring  themselves  into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  re- 
cruits, and  not  to  divide  their  attention,  will  cause 
them  to  execute  the  several  movepents  of  which  this 
lesson  is  composed,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after 
the  mechanism  be  well  comprehended,  with  arms. 


SCH'XiL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  87 

LESSON  V. 

Long  inarches  in  double   qiiick  time  and  the 
run. 


406.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the  ex- 
ercises iu  diiuble  quick  time  and  the  run,  with  arms 
and  knapsacks. 

407.  He  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  both  by  the  front  and  by  the  flauk, 
and  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to  pass 
over  a  distance  of  five  miles  in  sixty  minutes.  The 
pieces  will  be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and  some- 
times at  a  trail. 

408.  He  w^ill  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches,  at 
a  run,  the  i  ieces  carri^^d  at  will ;  the  i  leu  will  be  in- 
structed to  keep  as  united  as  possibh  .  without  how- 
ever exacting  much  regulaiity,  which  is  impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted 
to  when  it  may  be  highly  important  to  reach  a  given 
point  with  gre;it  promptitude. 

Stack  Arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will 
commaud : 

5fac/;— Arms. 

410.  At  this  command,  number  two  of  the  front  rank 
will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seize  it  with  the  left 


S8  SCnOpL  OF  THE  HOLDIEU-PAKT  HI. 

hand  alxmt  tli.o  middle  biuid,  plope  it  iicross  the  V...dy, 
barrel  to  the  rear,  the  butt  three  inches  above  the 
right  toe  of  the  man  on  his  left,  muzzle  six  inches  to 
the  right  of  his  right  shoulder. 

411.  Nnmbertwo  of  the  rear  rank  will  turnhispieee, 
lock  square  to  the  front,  r.nd  pass  it  to  his  front  rank 
man,  who  will  sieze  it  with  his  right  hand  about  the 
middle  band  and  incline  it  forward,  resting,  the  neck 
of  the  bayonet  on  that  of  his  own  bayonet  and  close  to 
the  blade.  Number  one  of  the  front  rank  will  turn  the 
barrel  of  his  piece  square  to  the  front,  slope  it  across 
the  body,  place  the  neck  of  his  "bayonet,  above  the 
necks,  and  between  the  blades  of  the  other  two  bayo- 
nets, h(dding  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  Uiid- 
dle  band,  the  butt  three  inches  from  the  ground  in  front 
of  his  right  toe.  • 

412.  Nuudjer  two  of  the  front  i-ank  will  throw  the 
butt  of  the  rear  rank  man's  piece  about  thirty  inches  to 
the  front,  at  the  same  time  resting  the  butt  ot  his  own 
piece  on  the  ground  on  the  left,  and  a  little  in  rear  of 
his  left  toe.  At  the  same  instant,  number  ore  of  the 
front  rank  will  restthe  butt  of  his  piece  on  the  ground, 
a  little  in  froiit  of  his  right  toe.  Number  one  of  the 
rear  rank  will  incline  his  piece  (m  the  stack  thus 
formed. 

413.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  posi- 
tion of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will 
C(mmiand : 


1.   Break  rau'i^.     2.  MARCH. 


SCHOOL  OF  TDE  SOLDIER— i' ART  111  i?9 

To  resume  arms. 

414.  Both  ranks  being  reformed  in  rear  of  their 
stacks,  the  instructor  will  command: 

T«/.c— Arms. 

415.  At  this  couiuiand,  number  one  ofthe  rear  rank 
will  retake  his  piece.  Number  two  of  the  front  rank 
will  seize  his  own  piece  with  his  left  hand,  at  the  mid- 
dle band,  and  his  rear  rank  man's  piece  in  the  same 
manner  with  his  right  hand;  and  number  one  of  the 
front  rank  will  seize  his  piece  with  his  right  hand  in 
the  same  manner.  These  two  men  will  raise  the  stack, 
bring  the  butts  together  and  disengage  the  bayonets. 
Number  two  ofthe  rear  rank  will  receive  his  piece 
from  his  front  rank  man,  and  all  will  resume  the  posi- 
tion of  ordered  arms. 


END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


7* 


TITLE  THIRD. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANT. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  School  of 
the  Company. 

1.  Instructi«>n  by  company  will  always  precede  that 
by  battalion,  and  the  object  being  to  prepare  the  sol- 
diers for  the  higher  school,  the  exercises  of  detail  by 
company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as  well  in  respect 
to  principles,  as  the  order  of  progression  herein  pre- 
scribed. 

2.  Tl'.ere  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing 
elementary  instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant, 
and  a  certain  number  of  file  closers,  the  whole  posted 
in  the  manner  indicated,  Title  First,  and,  accoruing  to 
the  same  title,  the  officer  charged  with  the  exercise  of 
such  company  will  herein  be  denominated  the  in- 
structor. 

fi.  The  School  of  the  Ci>mpany  will  bo  divided  into 
six  lessons,  and  each  lesson  will  comprehend  five  arti- 
cles, as  follows : 

LESSON  I. 

1.  To  open  ranks, 

2.  A!iy;nments  in  open  rank. 

(1)0) 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  91 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  close  ranks. 

5.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 


LESSON  II. 


1.  To  load  iu  four  times  and  at  will. 

2.  To  fire  by  company. 

3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

5.  To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 


LESSON  III. 


1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  to  align  it. 

3.  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and 
the  back  step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  iu  line  of  battle. 


LESSON  IV. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

3. .To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
to  face  it  to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  on  the  right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY, 


5.  Thi^  coinpaiiy  uiarcliitig  by  the  flank,  to  form  it 
by  company  or  platoou  into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face 
to  the  right  or  left  in  marching. 


LESSON  V. 


1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt, 
or  while  marching. 

2.  To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  in  column. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle,  eitlier  at  a  halt  or  marciiing. 


LESSON  VL 

I  /.;!!it  ,'■ 
L  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  com- 
pany. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to 
re-enter  into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  tlie  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks 
The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be  num- 
bered, and  for  this  purpose  will  connuand  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LlvSSON  I.  93 

In  each  rank — Count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  couiniand,  the  men  count  in  each  rank, 
from  right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct 
voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without  hurry  and  without 
turning  the  head,  one,  tico,  according  to  the  place  which 
each  one  occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the  company 
to  be  divided  into  platoons  and  sections,  taking  care 
that  the  first  platoon  is  always  composed  of  an  even 
number  of  files. 

G.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as 
possible  in  his  explanations  ;  he  will  cause  faults  of  de- 
tail to  be  rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom  he  will  in- 
dicate them,  if  the  captian  should  not  have  himself  ob- 
served them  ;  and  the  instruct(»r  will  not  otherwise  in- 
terfere, unless  the  captain  should  not  well  comprehend, 
or  should  badly  execute  his  intentions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him  who  com- 
mands, and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the  first  means  of 
order  in  a  body  of  troops,  the  instructor  will  labor  to 
habituate  the  company  to  the  essential  quality,  and  will 
himself  give  the  example. 


LESSON  FIRST. 

Article  First. 

To  open  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the   ranks 
and  file  closers  well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall 


94  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  L 

wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  he  will  direct  the 
left  guide  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Attention.     2.   Company.     3.  Shoulder — ARMS. 
4.    To  the  rear  open  order. 


9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant, 
and  the  left  guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear, 
four  paces  from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this  dis- 
tance by  the  eye,  without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  liimself  at  the  same 
time  on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe  if  these  two 
non-commissioned  officers  are  on  aline  paiallel  to  the 
front  rank,  and  if  necessary,  to  correct  their  positions, 
which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 


March. 


11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  standfast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without 
counting  the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the 
alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  conformingto  what  is 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank 
on  the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I  95 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the 
same  time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned,  will 
command : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
rear  lank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will 
direct  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  to  observe 
the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and  to  C(»rrect,  if 
neces.sary,  the  positions  of  persons  and  pieces. 

Article  Second. 
Alignments  in  ojfcn  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the 
first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better 
to  inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on 
the  right  or  left<»f  each  rank  to  march  two  or  three 
paces  forward,  and,  after  having  aligned  them,  com- 
mand : 

By  file  rio/it  for  left) — DRESS. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  suc- 
cessively on  the  alignment,  each  man  being  preceded 
by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  towards  the  basis, by 
two  paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned  himself,  will 
cast  his  eyes  to  the  front. 


9G  SCHOOL  OF  THK  COMPANY— LESSON  L 

21.  Successive  aligninentg  having  habituated  the 
soldiers  to  dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  forward  and  back- 
ward, sometimes  in  a  direction  parallel,  and  sometimes 
in  one  oblique,  to  the  original  direction,  giving,  in 
each  case,  two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  align- 
ment to  each  rank.  To  eifect  which,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


1.  Right  (or  hft)—T>RF.!i>i.    '2.  Front. 


I.   Right  for  left)  backinjrd — Dress.     2.  FRONT. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the  men 
of  the  rear  rank  vill  not  seek  to  cover  their  ti'e  lead- 
ers, as  the  sole  object  of  the  exercise  is  to  teach  them 
to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective  ranks, 
in  the  different  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  super- 
intend the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the 
rear  rank.  For  this  purp<»se,  they  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the 
Hue  of  their  shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their 
rank,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment- as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Xo. 
317  or  Xo.  321,  according  as  the  new  direction  shall  be 
in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPASY— LESSON  1. 


an 


25.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  the  captain  and 
the  covering  sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front  of  the 
ranks  to  correct  the  p  -iiriuti*  <.f  p^T-jv.s  and  arms. 


ARTTrf.r:  Third. 


Manual  of  Arms. 


26  The  ranks  being  (^n,  the  instructor  will  place 
himself  in  a  position  to  see  the  ranks,  and  will  com- 
mand the  manual  of  arms  in  the  following  order : 


Present  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 
Raise  arms. 
Support  arms. 
Fix  Bayonet. 
Charge  bayonet. 
Trail  arms. 
Unfix  bayonet. 
Secure  arms. 

Load 


Shomider  arms. 


Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder 
in  nine  times. 


27.  The  instructrr  will  take  care  that  the  p<»sitionof 
the  body,  of  the  feet,  and  of  the  piece,  be  alwava  ex- 
act, and  that  the  tiuies  be  brisikly  executed  and  close 
to  the  person. 


school  of  the  company— lesson  i. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  close  ranks. 


28.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor 
will  command : 


1.  Close  order.    2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close 
up  in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  his 
file  leader.  ,, 

Article  Fifth. 

Alignments,    and  manual    of  arms  in  closed 
ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause 
to  be  executed  parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the 
light  and  left,  forward  and  backward,  observing  to 
place  always  two  or  four  files  to  serve  as  a  basis  of 
alignment.  He  will  give  the  commands  prescribed. 
No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  themselves  to 
judge  the  aligument  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and  slioul- 
ders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the  front  and 
rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater 
number  of  the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will  comuiand 
Front,  and  re.  tify,  afterwards,  if  necessary,  the  align- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I.  99 

ment  of  the  other  men  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No,  3*20.  The  rear  rank  will  con- 
form to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superintended 
by  the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place 
himself  on  the  tlank  to  verify  their  alignment.  He  will 
also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers  accurately  his 
file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will  observe 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  dose.-s  will  preserve 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  without 
deranging  the  alignment,  will  first  cause  the  arras  to 
be  supported  or  ordered,  and  then  command  : 


hi  place — Rest. 

38.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be 
constrained  to  jireserve  silence  or  steadiness  of  posi- 
tion ;  but  they  will  always  keep  one  or  the  other  heel 
on  the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish 
to  rest  the  men  witb^iut  constraining  them  to  pre- 
serve the  alignment,  he  will  command: 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  their 
places. 


100         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESriON  11. 

41.  The  instructor  mny,  also,  when  he  sh.ill  judge 
proper,  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will  be  ex- 
ecuted as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 

LESSON  SECOND. 


42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second  les- 
son, will  cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks 
have  been  formed,  and  command  : 

].  Attention.     2.   Company.     3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and 
firings  to  be  executed  in  the  following  order  : 


Article  First. 

To  load  in  Jour  times  and  at  ivill. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  conmianded  and 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No. 
251 ,  ami  following.  The  instructor  will  cause  this  ex- 
ercise to  be  often  repeated,  in  succession, before  pass- 
ing to  loading  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  wi  1  will  be  commanded  and  execu- 
ted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  256. 
In  priming  when  loading  in  four  times,  and  also  at 
will,  the  captain  ai»d  covering  sergeant  will  half  face 
to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the  front  when 
the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  brings  his  piece 
to  the  shoulder. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LEHSON  H.         lOl 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause 
the  men,  in  the  different  loadings,  to  execute  what 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 
J>57  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  con- 
sequently the  one  with  which  it  is  most  important  to 
render  the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  preference  in 
the  exercises  the  moment  the  men  be  well  established 
in  the  principles.  To  these  they  will  be  brought  by 
degrees,  so  that  every  mau  may  be  able  to  load 
with  cartridges,  and  to  fire  at  least  three  rounds  in  a 
minute  with  ease  and  regularity.  , 

Article  Second. 

To. fire  hij  company. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by 
company  to  be  executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.   Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly 
place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file  closers  :  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place  himself 
opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general,  for  both 
the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  different 
firings. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add: 

1.  Company;  '2.  READY;  3.  Alm;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their 


102         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LEKSON  H. 

pieces,  and  then  take  the  position  of  ready,  as   pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the 
filing  by  the  commands  : 

1.  Company.     2.  AiM.     3.  FiRE.     4.  Load. 

53.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  sig- 
nal to  cease  firing  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,   simply  observing  to  pro- 

''nounce  right  (or  left)  oblique,  before  the  command 
aim. 


Article  Third. 

T/ie  fire  by  file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  file 

to  be  executed,  will  command :  i 

1.  Fire  by  Hie.     2.   Company.     3.  Ready.     4.  Com- 
mence firing. 

56.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  execu- 
ted its  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  275, 
and  followin-j. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of 
the  company;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  in-  I 
stant  the  first  brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  so  on 
to  the  left;  but  this  progression  will  only  be  observed 
in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man  will  re- 
load and  fire  without  regulating  himself  by  others, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY -LESSON  H.         103 

conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 


Article  Fourth. 

The  fire  by  rank. 


58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be 
executed,  will  command: 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Company.      3.  Ready. 
4.  Rear  rank — Alm.     5.  FiRE.     6.  Load. 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed 
as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  scddier.  No.  285 
and  following. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in 
the  rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  AiM.     3.  FiRE.     4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate 
ranks,  until  the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  t»»  the  right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  54. 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease, 
whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding 
the  signal  to  cease  firing ,  and  at  the  instant  this  sound 
commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire,  confi)rming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  282. 


104         SCHOOL  or  THE  COMrANY-LKSSON  II. 

64.  The  sigiKtl  to  ceafje  firing  will  be  alwnys  fol- 
lowed by  a  bugle  note  ;  at  wbicb  sniiiid,  the  captain 
and  coveriiig  sergeant  will  pr()ni])tly  rc^sunie  their 
places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  align- 
ment of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used,  the 
signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  indicated  by  the  com- 
mand, cease  firing,  which  will  be  pronounced  by  the 
instructor  when  he  wishes  the  semblance  of  firing  to 
cease. 

&Q.  The  command ;>06t?s  will  be  likewise  substituted, 
under  similar  circumstances,  for  the  bugle  note  em- 
ployed as  the  signal  for  the  return  of  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant  to  their  places  in  line,  which  com- 
mand will  be  given  when  the  insti'uctor  sees  the  men 
have  bj-ougbt  their  pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  tire  by  tilo  being  lii.it  which  is  most  fre- 
quently used  against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  important 
that  it  be  rendered  perfectly  familiar  to  the  troops. 
The  instructor,  will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive 
preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim  with 
care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  particular  ob- 
ject. As  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  men 
should  aim  with  precision  in  battle,  this  principle  will 
be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  for  purposes  of  in- 
struction. 


SCHOOL  OF  TfJE  COMPANY— LESSON  II.  105 


Article  Fifth." 
To  fire  hy  the  rear  rank. 

^^.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be 
executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To 
effect  this,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.      2.  Company.      3.  About 
^  —Face 


69.  At  the  first  c6mmand,  the  captain  will  step  out 
and  place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  t;Jie  right  file  of 
his  company  ;  the  covering  sergeant,  and  file  closers, 
will  pass  quickly  through  the  captain's  interval,  and 
place  themselves  faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  ser- 
geant a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers 
two  paces  from  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places 
inline,  each  passing  behind  the  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through 
the  interval,  the  company  will  face  about;  the  captain 
will  place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
become  the  front,  and  the  'covering  sergeant  will 
cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  and  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  com- 
pany, both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  by  file, 
and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  in  the  three  preceding  articles ;  the  cap- 
tain, covering  sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform 


106        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESS   N  U. 

themselves,  in  like  manner,  to  what  is  therein  pre- 
scribed. — 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the 
company,  now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank, 
the  firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will 
command : 


1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.   Company.     3.  About — 
Face. 

I 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  ser- 
geant and  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed Nos.  69  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having 
faced  about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  re- 
sume their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the 
men  the  importance  of  aiming  always  at  some  par- 
ticular object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  ]78. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain 
to  make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands  aim 
&ndi  Jire,  to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  position  to 
see  the  two  ranks,  in  order  to  detect  faults  ;  he  will 
charge  the  captain  and  file  closers  to  be  equally  watch- 
ful, and  to  report  to  him  when  the  ranks  are  at  rest. 
He  will  remand,  for  individual  instruction,  the  men 
who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly. 

70.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers, 
in  the  firings,  the  highest  degree  of  composure  or  pre- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IL        107 

f?ence  of  mind ;  he  will  neglect  nothing  that  may  con 
tribute  to  this  end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  general  principle, 
to  maintain,  in  the  direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place, 
in  order  that  the  alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may 
not  be  deranged  ;  and  he  will  verify,  by  examination, 
after  each  exercise  in  firing,  the  observance  of  this 
principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  addition  to  these 
remarks,  all  those  which  follow, 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it 
is  particularly  recomilfended  that  the  men  observe,  in 
uncocking,  whether  smoke  escapes  from  the  tube, 
which  is  a  certain  indication  that  the  piece  has  been 
discharged  ;  but  if,  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke'escapes, 
the  soldier,  in  such  case,  instead  of  re-loading,  will 
pick  and  prime  again.  If,  believing  the  load  to  be 
discharged,  the  soldier  should  put  a  second  cartridge 
in  his  piece,  he  ought  at  least,  to  perceive  it  in  ram- 
ming, by  the  height  of  the  load  ;  and  he  would  be  very 
culpable,  should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  instructor 
will  always  cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after  firing 
with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault  has 
been  committed,  of  putting  three  cartridges,  without 
a  discharge,  in  the  same  piece,  in  which  case  the  ball 
screw  will  be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed 
fire,  that  the  tube  is  found  stopped  up  with  a  hard, 
white,  and  compact  powder ;  in  this  case,  picking 
will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new  cap  substituted  for 
the  old  one. 


108         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  HL 

LESSON  THIRD. 

Article  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 


84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  cor- 
rectly aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  exer- 
cise it  in  marching  by  the  front,  he  will  assure  hunself 
that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering  ser- 
geant are  perfectly  in  the  liireetion  of  their  respective 
ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the 
captain  ;  the  instructor  will  then  place  himself  twenty- 
jBve  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  them,  face  to  the  rear, 
and  place  himself  exactly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing 
file,  will  command : 

1 .  Company,  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will 
move  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  :  the  in- 
structor, from  the  positi<m  prescribed,  will  correctly 
align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation  of  the  direct- 
ing file. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged 
with  the  direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is 
assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  a  straight 
line  which  would  pass  between  his  own  and  the  heels 
of  his  instructor. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IH.        109 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  step  aside,  and  command  : 

2   March. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  off  with  life. 
The  directing  sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  march- 
ing on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  ;  he  will  take  in 
succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the 
point  nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly 
in  the  same  line  with  the  first  two,andat  the  distance 
of  some  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
captain  will  march  steadily  in  the  trace  of  the  direct- 
ing sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him ;  the 
men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front, 
feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of 
direction,  and  conform  himself  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, school  of  the  soldier  for  the  march  by  the 
front. 

90  The  man  next  to  the  captain,  will  take  special 
care  not  to  pass  him ;  to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the 
line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the  same 
direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  dis- 
tance of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

To  <Ae— Step. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards 
the  directing  sergeant,  retake  the  step  from  him,  and 
again  direct  their  eyes  to  the  front. 


110        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I!I. 

94.  The  iustruc  or  will  cause  the  captain  and  cover- 
ing sergeant  to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and 
sometimes  on  the  left  of  the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the 
greatest  influence  on  the  march  of  the  company,  he 
will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his  step,  his  "habit 
of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given 
line  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line  without 
variation. 

96.  If  this  sergeant  should  ftiil  to  observe  these  prin- 
ciples, undulations  in  the  front  of  the  company  must 
necessarily  follow ;  the  men  will  be  unable  to  contract 
the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness, 
and  of  maintaining  their  shoulders  in  a  square  with  the 
line  of  direction — the  only  means  of  obtaining  perfec- 
tion in  the  march  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  bettor  to  estab- 
lish the  men  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and 
in  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line,  will  cause  the 
company  to  advance  three  or  four  hundred  paces,  at 
once,  without  halting,  if  the  ground  will  permit,  lu 
the  first  exercises,  he  will  march  the  company^  with 
open  ranks,  the  better  to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

98.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line  are  strictly  observed; 
he  will  generally  be  on  the  directing  flank,  in  a  position 
to  obsei-ve  the  two  ranks,  and  the  faults  they  may  com- 
mit ;  he  will  sometimes  halt  behind  th6  directing  file 
during  some  thirty  successive  steps,  in  order  to  judge 
whether  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing  file, 
deviate  from  the  perpendicular. 


SCHO.)L  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III.         Ill 

Article  Second. 

To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line  of  hat- 
tie,  and  to  align  it. 

99.  Tbe  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company, 
will  command  : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  directing  sergeant  will  remain  in  advance, 
unless  ordered  to  return  to  tlie  line  of  file  closers.  The 
company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  advance 
the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direction,  and 
align  the  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine 
himself  to  causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectified.  In 
this  last  case,  he  will  command  :  Captain,  rectify  the 
alignment.  The  captain  will  direct  the  covering  ser- 
geant to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  w'hen  each,  glancing 
his  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly  rectify  it,  con- 
forming to  what  is  pi'cscribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier. No.  320. 

Article  Third. 
Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  oblique- 
ly, he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  MARCH. 


112        SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III, 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  compauy  will  take 
the  oblique  step.  The  meu  will  accurately  observe  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
331.  The  rear  rank  men  will  preserve  their  distances, 
fe,nd  march  in  rear  of  the  man  next  to  the  right  (or 
leftj  of  their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march 
to  be  resumed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

104  At  the  commind  march,  the  company  will  re- 
sume the  direct  march.  The  instructor  will  move 
briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  andfoeing 
the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant;  and  then, 
by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same 
line,  if  he  be  not  already  on  it  i  the  latter  will  imme/- 
diately  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself 
and  the  instructor,  and  as  he  advances,  will  take  new 
points  of  direction,  as  is  explained  No.  89. 

105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the 
touch  of  elbows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side 
towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  without  any  indi- 
cation to  that  effect  being  given  ;  and  when  the  direct 
march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally  without 
indication,  on  the  side  where  it  was  previous  to  the 
oblique. 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique 
to  be  made  towards  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  al- 
so direct  the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on  the  directing 
sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the  same  perpendicular 
line  to  the  front  with  him,  while  following  a  parallel 
direction. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IIL        113 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the  in- 
structor will  be  watchful  that  the  men  follow  parallel 
directions,  in  conforniing  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  for  preserving  the  general 
alignment ;  whenever  the  men  lose  the  alignment,  he 
will  be  careful  that  they  regain  it  by  lengthening  or 
shortening  the  step,  without  altering  the  cadence,  or 
changing  the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of 
the  company  and  fiice  to  it,  in  order  to  regulate  the 
march  of  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  man  who  is  on 
the  flank  towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  and  to  see 
that  the  principles  of  the  march  are  properly  observed, 
and  that  the  files  do  not  crowd. 


Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  hack  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and  in 
quick  time,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time, 
will  command : 

1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 


114        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  HI. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

1.   Double  quick.     2.  MARCH. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand: 

1.   ^uick  time.     2.  MARCH. 


114.  The  commaiid  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may 
cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  step ;  to  this  effect,  he 
will  command : 

1.   Company  backward.     2.  MARCH. 

116.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor  will 
not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be  ta- 
ken in  succession,  and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  com- 
pany in  marching  in  double  quick  time  till  the  men 
are  well  established  in  the  length  and  swiftness  of  the 
pace  in  quick  time;   he  will  then  endeavor  to  render 


SCHOOL  OF-  THE  COMPANY— LESSEN  111.        115 

the  march  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the 
minute  equally  easy  and  fomiliar,  and  also  cause  them 
to  observe  the  same  eroctuess  of  body  and  composure 
of  mind,  as  if  marching  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if  a  sub- 
division (in  a  column)  has  to  change  direction  by 
turning,  or  has  to  form  into  line,  the  men  will  quicken 
the  pace  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  steps  in  a  minute. 
The  same  swiftness  of  step  will  be  observed  under  all 
circumstances  where  great  rapidity  of  movement  is  re- 
quired. But,  as  ranks  of  men  cannot  march  any  length 
of  time  at  so  swift  a  rate,  without  breaking  or  confu- 
sion, this  acceleration  will  not  be  considered  a  pre- 
scribed exercise,  and  accordingly  companies  or  bat- 
talions will  only  be  habitually  exercised  in  the  double 
quick  time  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  a 
minute. 


Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat. 

1 19.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  align- 
ed, when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march 
in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1    Company.     2.  About — Face. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  in- 
structor will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing  file, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No,  84. 


116         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IIL 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established,  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file,  will  command: 

3.  Company  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  86  and  87,  with  this 
difterence — he  will  place  himself  six  paces  in  front  of 
the  line  of  file  closers,  now  leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of 
file  closers,  opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  in- 
structor will  command : 

4.  March. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and 
the  men,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  89,  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  march- 
ing in  retreat,  all  that  is  prescribed  for  marching  in  ad- 
vance ;  the  commands  and  the  means  of  execution  will 
be  the  same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will, 
M'hen  he  may  wish,  cause  it  to  fiice  to  the  front  by  the 
command  prescribed  No.  119.  The  captain,  the  cov- 
ering sergeant,  and  the  directing  sergeant,  will  resume 
their  habitual  places  in  line,  the  moment  they  shall 
have  fiiced  about. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  HI.        117 

128.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank, 
if  the  instructor  should  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he 
will  cause  the  right  about  to  be  executed  while  march- 
ing, and  to  this  effect  will  command  : 

1.  Company.    2.  Right  about.     3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will 
promptly  face  about,  and  recommence  the  march  by 
the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with 
the  company,  and  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front 
of  the  file  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation  of  the 
guide.  The  instructor  will  place  him  in  the  proper  di- 
rection by  the  means  prescribed  No.  104.  The  cap- 
tain, the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  con- 
form to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in  re- 
treat. 

131.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to 
march  by  the  front  rank,  he  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands, and  will  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march  by 
the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in 
the  3d,  4th,  5th  and  6th  lessons  of  this  school,  with 
the  exception  of  the  march  backwards,  which  will  be 
executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the  same 
commands,  observing  to  add  double  quick  before  the 
command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoul- 
der, in  quick  time,  tie  distance  between  the  ranks 
will  be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  therefore,  the  in- 
structor brings  the  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this 
position,  the  rear  rank  must  shorten  a  little  the  first 
steps  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,  and 
will  lengthen  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order  to 


118         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IV. 

close  up  when  the  pieces  are  again  brought  to  a  shoul- 
der. In  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  distance 
between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches,  and  the 
piece,  will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  right  shoulder. 
134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  command 
halt.  The  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  distance. 
These  rules  are  general. 


LESSON  FOURTH. 
Article  First. 

To  march  by  the  jianlc. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle  and  at 
a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shalF  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Company,  right — FACE.     2.  Forward. 
3.  March. 

136.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having  step- 
ped out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left ;  the  front  rank 
will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier. No.  352;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time, 
side  step  to  the  right  one  pace,  and  double  in  the 
same  manner;  so  that  when  the  movement  is  com- 


•^ 


> 


?** 


1 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  IV.         119 

pleted,  the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned, 
and  elbow  to  elbow.  The  intervals  will  be  preser- 
ved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to 
the  right,  so  that  when  the  ranks  are  formed,  they  will 
be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move 
off  briskly  in  quick  time  ;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on  his  left,  will 
Inarch  straight  forward.  The  men  of  each  file  will 
march  abreast  of  their  respective  front  rank  men,  heads 
direct  to  the  front ;  the  file  closers  will  march  oppo- 
site their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles  of  the 
march  by  the  flank  to  be  observed,  in  placing  himself 
pending  the  march,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier  No.  357. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left 
flank  to  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  substi- 
tuting left  for  right;  the  ranks  will  double  as  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  school  for  the  soldier.  No.  354  ;  the 
rear  rank  will  side-step  to  the  left  one  pace  before 
doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left, 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank  ;  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  left, 
and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this  guide  ;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the 
front  rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the 
left. 


120      school  of  the  company— lesson  iv. 
Article  Second. 

To  change  direction  hy  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and 
either  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  jilt  left  (or  right.)    2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  first  file  will 
wheel;  if  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the  lat- 
ter will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  describe 
a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little  the  first  five 
or  six  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth  n)an  of 
this  file  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement.  If  the 
wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank 
man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and 
the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement  by 
describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  explained. 
Each  file  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  where 
that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  these  principles,  in  order  that  the 
distance  between  the  files  may  always  be  preserved, 
and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the  wheel- 
ing point. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IV.        121 

Article  Third 


To  halt  tlie  company  marching  hy  the  flank, 
and  to  face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand": 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.     3.   FRONT. 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 
359  and  360.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubled, 
the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The 
captain  and  covering  sergeant,  as  well  as  the  left 
guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return  to 
their  habitual  places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  compa- 
ny faces  to  the  front.  0 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company  by 
one  of  the  means  prescribed.  No.  100. 


Article  Fourth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank, 

to  form  it  on  the  right  (or  left)  by  file 

into  line  of  battle. 

148,  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right,  hyfile  into  line.     2.  March. 
9* 


122         aCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSOxN  IV. 


149.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men 
doubled  will  mark  time  ^  the  captain  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straight  for- 
ward, and  be  halted  by  the  instructor  when  they  shall 
have  passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file 
closers ;  the  captain  will  ])l!ice  himself  corn'ctly  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and  Avill  direct  the  alignment  as  the 
men  of  the  front  rank  successively  arrive;  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  place  himself  behind  the  captain  at 
the  distance  of  the  rear  rank  ;  the  two  men  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to 
march,  and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and 
the  captain,  will  turn  to  the  right ;  after  turning,  they 
will  continue  to  march,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct 
themselves  towards  the  line  of  battle,  but  when  they 
shall  arrive  at  two  paces  froui  this  line,  the  even  num- 
ber will  shorten  the  step  so  that  the  odd  number  may 
precede  him  on  the  line,  tlie  odd  number  ])lacing  him- 
sel%by  the  side  and  on  the  left  of  the  captain;  the 
even  number  will  afterwards  oblique  to  the  left,  and 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd  number;  the  next 
two  men  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the 
same  manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the 
right,  and  place  themselves,  according  to  the  means 
just  explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of,  the  iwo 
men  already  established  on  the  line  ;  the  remaining 
files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be 
formed  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank 
doubled  will  execute  the  movement  in  the  manner 
already  explained  for  the  front  rank,  taking  care  not 
to  commence  the  movement  until  four  men  of  the  front 
rank  are  established  on  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  rear 
rank  luen,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accu- 
ately  their  file  leaders. 


%- 


^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMrANY— LESSON  IV.         123 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
the  iustructor  will  cause  it  to  form  by  file  <m  the  left 
into  line  of  battle,  according  t(»  the  same  principles  and 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  left 
for  right.  In  this  case,  the  odd  numbers  will  shorten 
the  step,  so  that  the  even  numbers  may  precede  them 
on  the  line.  The  captain  placed  on  the  left  ot  the 
front  rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their 
phices  in  line  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  instructor,  af- 
ter the  company  shall  be  formed  and  aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend 
the  mechanism  of  this  movement,  the  instructor  will 
at  first  cause  it  to  be  executed  separately  by  each 
rank  doubled,  and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks  united 
and  doubled. 

152.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  and  without  the  point  where  the  right  or  left  is 
to  rest,  in  order  to  establish  the  base  of  the  alignment, 
and  afterwards,  he  w-ill  follow  up  the  movement  to  as- 
sure himself  that  each  file  conforms  itself  to  what  is 
prescribed  jS^o.  149. 

Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  hymthe  flank,  to 
form  it  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into 
line,  and  to  cause  it  to  fare  to  the  right  and 
left  in  marching. 

153.  The  company  beingin  march  by  the  right  flank, 
the  instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form  it  into 
line  ;  the  captain  will  immediitely  command  :  \.  By 
Company,  into  line ;  2.  March. 


124         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IV. 

154  At  the  command  march,  the  co^:£>ring  sergeant 
will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the  men  will 
advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  double  quick 
step,  and  move  into  line,  by  the  shortest  route,  taking 
care  to  undouble  the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one 
after  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in 
line  with  the  covering  sergeant,  they  will  take  from 
him  the  step,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

156.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the 
movements  of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  with- 
out endeavoring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same  time  with 
the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  cap- 
tain will  face  to  his  company  in  order  to  follow  up  the 
execution;  and,  as  soon  as  the  C(mipany  is  formed,  he 
will  command,  guide  left,  place  himself  two  paces 
before  the  centre,  face  to  the  front,  and  take  the  step 
of  the  company 

158.  At  the  command  ^wirfc  left,  the  second  sergeant 
will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the 
left,  to  serve  as  guide,  and  the  covering  sei'geant  who 
is  on  the  oppotite  flank  will  remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank, 
this  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands, and  according  to  the  same  principles;  the  com- 
pany being  formed,  the  captain  will  command  guide 
n "■/«<,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  his  company  as 
above ;  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  will  serve  as  guide,  and  the  second 
sergeant  placed  on  the  left  flank  will  remain  there. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESd   N  IV.         125 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  iu 
front,  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  of 
each  company  will  always  be  placed  on  the  right  and 
left,  rel^pectively  of  the  front  rank  ;  they  will  be  de- 
nominated right  guide  and  left  guide,  and  the  one  or 
the  other  charged  with  the  direction. 

IGl.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if 
it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to  form 
platoons,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command  : 


1.  By  platoon,  into  line.      2.  March. 

162.  This  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  pla- 
toon according  to  the  above  principles.  The  captain 
will  place  iiimself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon, 
and  the  first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the  second, 
passing  through  the  opening  made  in  the  centre  of  the 
company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and 
around  the  left  of  this  plattwn,  if  the  march  be  by  the 
lett :  in  this  last  case,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around 
the  left  of  the  second  platoon  in  order  to  place  himself 
in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieutenant, 
without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command  guide 
left  (i>r  right,)  at  the  instant  their  respective  platoons 
are  f«)rmed., 

163.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right,)  the 
guide  of  each  platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  indica- 
ted flank  of  the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  Avill  always 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first  [)la- 
toon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve,  in 
like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 


126         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSEN  IV. 

365.  Thus  in  a  coluinn,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but 
one  guide  to  each  platoon ;  he  will  always  be  placed 
on  its  left  flank,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  on  the 
right' flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

166.  In  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will  follow 
the  platoons  to  which  they  are  attached. 

167.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  company,  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by  platoon, 
into  line,  by  his  own  direct  commands,  using  those 
prescribed  by  the  captain.  No.  153  or  161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in 
passing,  without  a  halt,  from'  the  march  by  the  front, 
to  the  march  by  the  flank,  and  recipfitcally.  In  eithep 
case  he  will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier.  No.  363,  substituting  coinpany  for 
squad.  The  company  will  face  to  the  riglit  <»r  left,  in 
marching,  and  the  captain,  the  guides,  and  file  closers 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  each 
in  the  march  by  the  flank,  or  in  the  march  by  the  front 
of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a  subdivision  of  a  column. 

169.  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  march- 
ing, the  company  find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
captain  will  placehimself  two  paces  behind  the  centre 
of  the  fi  out  rank,  now  in  th  >  rear,  the  guides  will  pass 
to  the  i-ear  rank, now  leading,  and  the  file  closers  will 
march  in  front  of  this  rank. 


170.  The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the 
men,  and  to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent  in  the 


Mfr. 


JU^ 


« Mil  WHIM 

fie       ^    ^ 
X 


& 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESSON  V.  127 

position  of  shoulder  arms,  will  sometimes  order  sup- 
port arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and  arms  on  the 
right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 


LESSON  FIFTH. 
Article  First. 

To  break  into  colwmn  by  platoon,  either  at  a 
hah  or  in  a  march. 


171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle, 
the  instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by 
platoon  to  the  right,  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  tcheel.     2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
rapidly  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  centres 
of  their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant  passing 
around  the  left  of  the  company.  They  need  not  occu- 
py themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the  other.  The 
covering  sergeant  will  replnce  the  captain  in  the  front 
rank 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  standing  fast;  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond 
the  point  at  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when 
the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  face  to  the  late  rear,  and 
place  himself  so  that  the  line  which  he  forms  Avith  the 


128  SCHOOL  OF  TOE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

man  on  the  right  (who  had  faced,)  shall  be  perpendic- 
ular to  that  occupied  by  the  company  in  line  of  bat- 
tle ;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and 
when  the  man  who  condncts  the  marching  tl.ink  shall 
approach  to  near  the  perpendicular,  its  chief  will 
command : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  HALT. 


174.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank 
shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpendic- 
ular, the  platoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sei-geant  will 
move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is 
to  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  second  sergeant 
will  place  himself,  in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the 
second  platoon.  Each  will  take  care  to  leave  be.tween 
himself  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  his  platoon,  a 
space  equal  to  its  front ;  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant 
will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align  the  ser- 
geant between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon  who 
had  f^iced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon  being  thus  estab- 
lished on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place  him- 
self two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  facing  towards 
him,  will  command : 

3.  Left— Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  command,  F'liONT,  and  place  himself  two 
paces  before  its  centre. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  129 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  tho 
movement  of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving  al- 
ways the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank, 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  same  pmuciples.  The  instructor 
will  comm'tnd : 


1.  By  platoon,  left  ichcel     2.  MARCH. 


179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the 
same  manner  as  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man 
of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  platoons 
will  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  chiefs  of 
platoon  will  conform  to  the  principles  indicated  Nos. 
173  and  174. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of 
each  platoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  second  sergeant 
near  the  lelt  of  the  second  platoon,  will  each  move  to 
the  points  where  the  right  of  the  platoon  is  to  rest. 
The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be  careful  to  align 
the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  pla- 
toon who  had  fiiced  to  the  left,  and  will  then  command : 


TJiWti— Dress. 


182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  oppo- 
site its  centre. 


130         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company 
by  platoon  to  the  right,  and  to  move  the  colnmn  for- 
ward after  the  wheel  is  completed,  will  caution  the 
company  to  that  effect,  and  command  : 


1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
move  rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective  platoons,  con- 
forming to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  172,  and  will 
remain  in  this  position  during  the  continuance  of  the 
wheel.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to  the  principles  herein 
prescribed  ;  the  mnn  on  the  pivot  will  not  face  to  the 
right,  but  will  mark  time,  conforming  himself  to  the 
movement  of  the  marching  flank  ;  and  wht'n  the  man 
who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive  near  the 
perpendicular,  the  instructor  will  command  : 


3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  platoons  will 
move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men  taking  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches.  The  covering  sergeant  and  the 
second  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their 
respective  platoons,  the  former  passing  before  the  front 
rank.  The  leading  guide  will  immediately  take  points 
on  the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may  be  indicated 
to  him  by  the  instructor. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.         131 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose 
his  distance,  or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will  conform 
to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  Nos.  202  and  203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the 
front,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon 
to  the  right  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  command 
march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the  manner  already 
explained;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  lake  care  to 
mark  time  in  his  place,  without  advancmg  or  reced- 
ing; the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the 
guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  Nos. 
184  and  following. 

190.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to 
the  left  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means,  the  instructor  giving  the  commands  pre- 
scribed Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting  left  for  right, 
and  reciprocally. 

191.  The  movements  explained  in  Nos.  183  and  189 
will  only  be  executed  after  the  company  has  become 
well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  march  in  col- 
umn, Articles  Second  and  Third. 


Rema?-ks. 


192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company, 
will  observe  whether  the  movement  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  above  ;  whether 
the  platoons,  after  breaking  into  cdurau,  are  perpen- 
dicular to  the  line  of  battle  just  occupied  ;  and  whether 
the  guide,  who  placed  himself  where  the  marching 


132  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

flank  of  his  platoon  had  to  rest,  has  left,  between  him- 
self and  the  front  rank  man  on  the  r'ght,  (or  left,),  the 
space  necessary  to  contain  the  front  of  the  platoon. 

193.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rear- 
most guide  should  not  accurately  cover  the  leading 
one,  he  will  not  seek  to  correct  his  position  till  the 
coliunn  be  put  in  march,  unless  the  instructor,  wishing 
to  wheel  immediately  into  line,  should  think  it  neces- 
sary to  rectify  the  direction  of  the  guides,  which  would 
be  executed  as  will  be  hereinafter  explained  in  Ar- 
ticle Fifth  of  this  lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the  man  on 
the  right  (or  left)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the  com- 
mand march,  ftices  to  the  right  (or  left)  being  the  true 
pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank  man  next  to  him 
ought  to  gain  a  little  ground  to  the  front  in  wheeling, 
so  as  to  clear  the  pivot  man. 


Article  Second. 
To  march  in  column. 


195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right 
(or  left)  in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the 
column  to  march,  will  throw  himself  twenty-five  or 
thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  himself 
correctly  on  their  direction,  and  caution  the  leading 
guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

196  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide 
of  the  leading  platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  133 

ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between  his  own 
and  the  heels  of  his  instructor. 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  step  aside,  and  ct)mmaud  : 

1.  Column  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right.) 
3.  March. 


198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will 
lead  otf,  l)y  a  decided  step,  their  respective  platoons, 
in  order  that  the  whole  may  move  smartly,  and  at  the 
same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his 
neighbor  towards  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in 
marching  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier  No.  327.  The  man  next  to  the  guide,  in 
each  platoon,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and 
also  to  march  always  about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or 
lett)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the  di- 
rection. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  great- 
est precision,  the  length  aiid  cadence  of  the  step,  and 
maintain  the  direction  of  his  march  by  the  means  pre- 
scribed No.  89. 

201 .  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the 
trace  of  the  leading  one,  preserving  between  the  latter 
and  himself  a  distance  precisely  equal  to  the  front  of 
his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the  same  step  with  the 
leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from 
the  one  leading,  (which  can  only  happen  by  his  own 
fault,)  he  will  correct  himself  by  slightly  lengthening 


134  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

or  shorteuing  a  few  steps,  in  order  that  there  may  not 
be  sudden  quickeuings  or  shickei;ings  in  the  march  of 
his  phitoon. 

203.  If  the  same  guide  having  neglected  to  march 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  find  himself 
sensibly  out  t>f  the  direction,  he  will  remedy  this  fault 
by  advancing  more  or  less  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the 
true  direction,  and  thus,  in  a  few  steps,  insensibly  re- 
gain it,  without  the  inconvenience  of  the  oblique  step, 
wljich  would  cause  a  l(»ss  of  distance.  In  all  cases, 
each  chief  of  platoon  will  cause  it  to  conform  to  the 
movements  of  its  gu'de. 


RcTnarJ^s  on  the  march  in  column. 


204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisons  neglect 
to  lead  ofiand  to  decide  the  march  fntm  the  first  step, 
the  march  will  be  begun  in  uncertainty  which  will 
cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step,  and  a  loss  of  dit^tance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps  the 
march  of  his  subdivision,  and  that  which  follows,  will 
be  uncertain  ;  there  will  be  undulations,  quickeuings, 
and  slackenings  in  the  march. 

20G.  It  the  same  guide  be  not  habituated  to  prohmg 
a  given  direction,  without  deviation,  he  will  describe 
a  crooked  line,  and  the  column  must  wind  to  conform 
itself  to  such  line 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he  will  lose 
his  distance  at  every  m(mient  in  endeavors  to  regain 
the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which  is  the  most  im- 
portant principle  in  the  march  in  column. 


rj 


fij       m     o 


^, 


^-ri 


-i    Hj      -C 


p  -I 
fit     5} 


SCHOOL  QF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  135 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  ia  column  will 
be  responsible  for  the  direction,  distance,  and  step  ;  the 
chief  of  the  subdivision,  for  the  order  and  conformity 
of  his  subdivision  with  the  movements  of  the  guide. 
Accordingly,  the  chief  will  frequently  turn,  in  the 
march,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

209.  The  instructor  placed  on  the  flank  of  the  guides, 
will  watch  over  the  execution  of  all  the  principles 
prescribed ;  he  will,  also,  sometimes  place  himself  in 
the  rear,  align  himself  on  the  guides,  and  halt,  pending 
some  thirty  paces  together,  to  verify  the  accuracy  of 
the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always 
repent,  with  the  greatest  piomptitude,  thecomnumds, 
march  and  lialt,  no  chief  waiting  for  another,  but  ««ach 
repeating  the  command  the  moment  he  catches  it  from 
the  instructor.  They  will  repeat  no  other  command 
given  by  him  ;  but  will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their 
subdivision^,  in  an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will 
have  to  execute,  as  indicated  by  the  commands  of 
caution. 


Article  Third. 
To  change  direction. 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while 
marching,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  wheeling  on  the  march.  Whenever, 
therefore,  a  column  is  to  change  direction,  the  in- 


136  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LgriSON  V. 

structor  will  change  the  ^ukle,  if  not  already  there,  to 
the  flank  oppi  site  the  side  to  which  the  change  is  to 
be  made. 

212.  The  coliimu  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it 
be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  the  direction  to 
the  right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a  marker 
to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be 
made  ;  the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place  himself  on 
the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast 
to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  w-ill  direct  his  march  on  that 
per^ion,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze 
his  breast.  When  the  leaduig  guide  shall  have  ap- 
proached near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  platoon 
will  command: 

1.  Right  wheel.    2   March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
platoon  is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the 
marker. 

215.  At  the  command  inarch,  which  will  be  pronoun- 
ced at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived  oppo- 
site the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right, 
conforming  to  what  is  presci  ibed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier.  No.  396. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  will  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  MARCH. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronouced  and  exe 
cuted  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COIMPANY -LESSON  V.         137 

398  and  399.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take 
points  on  the  ground  in  the  new  direction,  in  order  the 
better  to  regulate  the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  retake  the  direct  march  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  same  means  which  governed 
the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the  left, 
he  will  command,  guide  right.  At  this  command,  the 
two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  re- 
spective platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  subdi- 
vision ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
right;  the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  change 
of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the 
instructor  will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in 
front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time, 
the  platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  forma- 
tions in  line,  which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning 

10* 


133         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 

to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  sometimes 
cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide.  In  this  ease,  the  chief  of  the  leading  pla- 
toon will  command:  Left  for  right)  turn,  instead  of 
left  (or  right)  wheel.  The  subdivisions  will  each  turn, 
in  succession,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  st)ldier.  No.  402.  The  leading  guide,  as 
soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground, 
the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 

225  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve  dis- 
tances and  the  direction,  that  all  the  subdivisions  of 
the  column  should  change  direction  precisely  at  the 
point  where  the  leading  subdivision  changed ;  it  is  for 
this  reason  that  that  point  ought"  to  be  marked  in  ad- 
vance, and  that  it  is  prescribed  that  the  guides  direct 
their  march  on  the  marker,  also  that  each  chief  of  sub- 
division shall  not  cause  the  change  to  commence  till 
the  guide  of  his  subdivision  has  graced  the  breast  of 
this  marker. 

226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdivision 
arrives  at  the  point  of  change  in  a  square  with  the  line 
of  direction  ;  with  this  view,  he  will  face  to  his  subdi- 
vision when  the  one  which  precedes  has  commenced  to 
turn  or  to  wheel,  and  he  will  be  watchful  that  it  con- 
tinues to  march  squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the  point 
where  the  change  of  direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  the  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the 
subdivision  which  wheels  should  not  clear  the  wheel- 
ing point,  the  next  subdivision  would  be  arrested  and 
distances  lost;  lor  the  guide  who  conducts  the  march- 
ing flank  having  to  describe  an  arc,  in  length  about  a 
half  greater  than  the   front  of  the   subdivision,  the 


SCPIOOL  OF  THIC  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  139 

second  subdivision  would  be  already  up  with  the 
wheeling  point,  whiktthe  first  which  wheels  has  yet  the 
half  of  its  front  to  execute,  and  h-^nce  would  be  obliged 
to  mark  time  until  that  half  be  executed.  It  is  there- 
fore prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdivision 
should  take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches  in  length, 
according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  order  not  to 
an  est  the  march  of  the  next  subdivision.  The  chiefs 
of  subdivisi(!U  will  look  well  to  the  step  of  the  pivot, 
and  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened  as 
may  be  judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of  this  move- 
ment, the  centre  of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little 
to  the  rear. 


228.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the 
cadence  of  the  step,  whether  the  change  of  direction 
be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or  to  the  opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  will 
always  present  his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column. 
The  instructor  will  take  the  greatest  pains  in  causing 
the  prescribed  principles  to  be  observed  ;  he  will  see 
that  each  subdivision  only  commences  the  change  of 
direction  when  the  guide,  grazing  the  breast  of  the 
marker,  has  nearly  passed  him,  and,  that  the  march- 
ing flank  does  not  describe  the  arc  of  too  large  a  circle, 
in  order  that  it  may  not  be  thrown  beyond  the  new  di- 
rection. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel  the  guide  of 
the  wheeling  flunk  will  cast  his  eyes  over  the  ground 
at  the  moment  of  commencing  the  wheel,  and  will  de- 
scribe an  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  equal  to  the 
front  of  the  subdivision. 


140       scijool  of  the  company— lesson  v. 
^  Article  Fourth. 

To  halt  the  column. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  theiustruc- 
toi-  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  \\ill  command : 

1.  Column.    2.  Halt, 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt;  the  guides 
also  will  stand  fast,  although  they  may*  have  lost  both 
distance  and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt,  be  not  repeated  with  the 
greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant,  dis- 
tances will  be  h)st. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to 
recover  it  after  that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his 
fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if  he  have  marched 
well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his  proper  distance;  and  if 
the  latter  regain  what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement 
will  be  propagated  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 


Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  hy  platoon,  to  form  to  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  a!  a 
halt  or  on  the  tnarch. 

235.  The  instructor  having    halted  ^  the    column, 
right  in  front,  and  wishing  to   form  it  into  line  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  141 

battle,  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of 
the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessa- 
ry, the  position  of  the  guide  beyond ;  which  being  ex- 
ecuted, he  will  command : 


Left— Dress. 


23G.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place  him- 
self briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct 
the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  di- 
rection of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will 
command  Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in 
column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor  will 
command: 


1.  Left  into  line  wheel.     2.  MARCH. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of 
each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who 
stands  fast;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the 
principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in  conftu-mity  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn  to 
his  platoon  to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the 
marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 


142         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- LESSON  V. 

240.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  -wLcn  the 
marching  flank  of  the  i)hitoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle. 

241 .  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted 
it,  willretnrn  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around 
the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon, 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the 
company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  command  : 


Right— T>K^SS. 

243.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right 
of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  opposite  the 
instructor  established  on  the  direction  of  the  guides, 
will  ]>lace  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  this 
oflicer.  The  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from 
the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  com- 
pany. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command : 

Front. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of 
battle,  will  command : 

Guides— ?O^TS. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will 
cover  the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instruc- 
tor should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.         143 

]ic  ^vill  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the 
Iciiding  yuide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessaiy, 
the  position  of  the  guide  beyond;  which  being  execu- 
ted, he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line,  xchcd      2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on 
the  right  of  each  platoon  will  f:ice  to  the  right  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide 
by  his  side,  who  stands  fast ;  each  platoon  will  wheel 
to  the  right,  and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  when  the 
marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle; 
for  this  purpose,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

240.  The  C(nnniand  halt,  will  be  given  when  the 
marchi)ig  tt;tnk  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank  of 
file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will 
move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  com- 
pany will  rest,  and  comm.and: 

Le/it— Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment ;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  sec- 
ond phito(»n,  opposite  the  instructor,  v\ill  place  his 
breast  %htly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  officer,  and 
the  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  left  on 
the  mau  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 


144  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESS  JN  V. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command : 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the 
right  of  his  company,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file 
closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or 
right  (l7-ess,  previous  to  commanding  left  or  right  into 
line,  irhccl,  unless,  after  rectifying  the  position  of  the 
guides,  it  should  become  necessary  to  dress  the  pla- 
toons, or  one  of  them,  latterally  to  ihe  right  or  left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left  (or 
right)  into  line,  wheel,  will  assure  himself  that  the  rear- 
most platoon  is  at  its  exact  wheeling  distance  from  the 
one  in  front.  This  attention  is  impt)rtaut,  in  order  to 
detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides  in  this  essential 
point. 

257.  If  the  column  bo  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  f(»rm  it  into  line  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  238,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance 
in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  ofplatoon,  tlie  left  guides  will  halt  ghort,  the 
instructor,  the  chiefs  ofplatoon,  and  the  platoons,  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  239  and  following. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V.  145 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this  for- 
mation will  be  made  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without 
haltiuir  the  column,  and  to  march  the  company  in  line 
to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Bij  platoons  left  tcheel.     2.  MARCH. 


261.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt ;  the  man 
next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  time; 
the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When  the 
right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  instructor  will  command  : 


3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.    Guide  right   for  left.) 


262  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company 
will  move  off  together  with  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
the_  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide  wall  take 
their  positions  as  in  line  of  battle. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  im- 
mediately after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  move  briskly  to  the 
side  on  which  the  guide  is  designated.  The  non-com- 
missioned officer  charged  with  the  direction  will  move 


146        SOHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 

rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide,  and  will  be  assured  in  his 
line  of  march  by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribed  No. 
104.  That  non-commissioned  officer  will  immediately 
take  points  on  the  ground  as  indicated  in  the  same 
number.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line. 

264.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  colunm 
left  in  front. 


LESSON  SIXTH. 
Article  First. 

To  hreak  the  company  into  j^^citoons,  and  to 
rc-forni  the  company. 

To  hreah  the  coinjmny  into  flatoons. 


265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step, 
and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  by 
plato{>n,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
connnand:  1.  Break  into  platoons^  and  immediately 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first 
lieutenant  will  pass  quickly  around  the  left  to  tlie  cen- 
tre of  his  platoon,  and  give  the  caution  :  Mark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command:     2.  March. 


VS: 


5--3E& 


:rirT:3 


a;      S  a      CD 


mt%' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY  .  ^^^^^  ^j    I47 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  contin,,  ,  uiarch 
straight  forward ;  the  covering  sergeant  wi,'*^^^^^.^  ^.g^. 
pidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passinj^^^,  ^^^ 
front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaj»p^_ 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time;  its  chief 
will  Immediaely  add:  1.  Right  oblique.  2.  March. 
The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that  this  platoon 
may  commence  obliquing  the  instant  the  rear  rank  of 
the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The  men  will 
shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the  com- 
mand/or?mr(Z  march  IS  given,  the  platoon  may  have 
its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the 
direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the 
second  will  command  Foricard,  and  add  March,  the 
instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the 
guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will 
break  into  platoon-s  by  inverse  means  applying  to  the 
first  platoon  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  the  sec- 
ond and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will 
shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the 
covering  sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 


To  re-form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right 
in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  command  :  Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will 


148  SCHOOI    ''  ™^  COMPANY-LESSON  VI. 

ini media f  •'^^^  *  ^'  ^^^^^^  P^^^^oo7i ;     2.  Riglil  oblique. 
275  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it 
to  .ohtinue  to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command  :    3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  bj- the  chief  of  the 
second,  the  first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in 
order  to  unmask  the  second  ;  the  covering  sergeant, 
on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right 
of  the  company,  passing  by  the  front  rank. 

278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  un- 
masked the  second,  the  captain  will  command : 
1.  Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall 
be  complete,  he  will  add  :  2.  March.  The  first  pla- 
toon will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  moan  time  the  second  platoon  will  have 
continued  to  march  straightforward,  and  when  it  shall 
be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain  will  command 
Forward,  and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons  shall 
unite,  add  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will  then  cease 
to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement 
will  be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the 
second  platoon  giving  the  command  Foricard,  and  the 
captain  adding  the  command  March,  when  the  pla- 
toons are  united, 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right, 
will  pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoon  be- 
gins to  oblique ;  the  guide  of  the  first,  on  its  right,  re- 
maining on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the 
company  to  break  and  reform,  by  platoon,  by  his  own 


SCHOOL  OF  TflE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL        149 

direct  commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give  the  gen- 
eral commands  prescribed  for  the  captain  above : 
1.  Break  into  platoons;  2.  MARCH;  and  1.  Form 
Company;  2.  MARCH. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the 
subdivision  that  breaks  off  should  mark  time  too  long, 
it  might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions,  arrest  the 
march  of  the  following  one,  which  would  cause  a 
lengthening  of  the  column,  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  platoons  which  oblique  should  not  shorten  the  step 
too  much,  in  order  not  to  lose  distance  in  column, 
and  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  subdi- 
vision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  it 
would  be  obliged  to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite 
flank,  to  regain  the  direction,  and  by  the  double  move- 
ment arrest,  probably,  the  march  of  the  following 
subdivision. 

286.  The  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique  will 
face  to  their  platoons,  in  order  to  enforce  the  observ- 
ance of  the  forgoing  principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they 
break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance 
that  each  company  should  continue  to  march  in  the 
same  step,  without  shortening  or  slackening,  whilst 
that  which  precedes  breaks,  although  the  following 
company  should  close  up  on  the  preceding  one.  This 
attention  is  essential  to  guard  agarinst  an  elongation 
of  the  column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a 
few  companies,  would  be  serious  inconveniences  in  a 
general  column  of  many  battalions.     Hence  the  in- 


150         SCHOOL  OF  THE  C'MPANY— LESSON  VL 

structor  will  give  the  greatest  care  in  causing  all  the 
prescribed  principles  to  be  strictly  observed.  To  this 
end,  he  will  hold  himself  on  the  directing  flank,  the 
better  to  observe  all  the  nioveuments. 


Article   Second. 


Being  in  column^   to  hreak  files  to  the  rear, 
and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 


289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  right  for  left)  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  files  to 
break  oft'he  will  give  the' order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  immediately  turn  to  his  company, and  command: 

1.   Two  files  from  left  {oY  right)  to  rear.     2.  March. 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the 
left  ("or  right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  tlie 
others  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward ;  the  two 
rear  rank  men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as  the  rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  move  to  the 
right  by  advancing  the  outer  shoulder;  the  odd  num- 
ber will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file  from  that 
flank,  the  even  number  behind  the  fourth,  passing  for 
this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number;  the  two  front 
rank  men  will,  in  like  manner,  m(»ve  to  the  right  when 
the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  the  odd 
number  will  place  himself  behind  the  first  file,  the  even 


r„^,^ ..    ^H^H 


i^l 


V 


<^^*^ 


W    9 


tj 


,A 


M^ 


rt    ■^ 


TT^Tc:r.T7Ti"t!rTrTTTxrrxT 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL         151 

number  behind  the  second  file,  passing  for  this  purpose 
behind  the  odd  number.  If  the  files  are  broken  from 
the  right,  the  men  will  move  to  the  left,  advancing  the 
outer  shoulder,  the  even  miniber  of  therear  rank  will 
place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  number  of 
the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth  ;  the  even  number  of 
the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file,  the  odd  number  of 
same  rank  behind  the  second,  the  odd  numbers  for 
this  purpose  passing  behind  the  even  numbers.  The 
men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances  and  to 
keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break  two 
files  from  the  same  side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  proceed  as  above  directed. 

292.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  files  already  broken,  advancing  a  little  the  outer 
shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  to  the  right, 
if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if 
the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  shortening,  at  the 
same  time,  the  step,  in  order  to  make  room  between 
themselves  and  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the 
files  last  ordered  to  the  rear  ;  the  latter  will  break  by 
the  same  commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
first.  The  men  who  double  should  increase  the  length 
of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent  distances  from  being 
lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of 
a  company  by  breaking  off  successive  groups  of  two 
files,  but  the  new  files  must  always  be  broken  from 
the  same  side. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broken 
off  to  return  into  line,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  immediately  command  : 


152  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COxMPANY— LESSON  VL 

1.   Two  Jiles  into  line.     2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of 
those  marching  by  the  flank  will  return  briskly  into 
line,  and  the  others  will  gain  the  space  of  two  tiles 
by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards  the  flank  to 
which  they  belong. 

29G.  The  captain  w'ill  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch 
the  observance  of  the  principles  which  have  just  been 
prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two 
files  to  break  one  after  another,  and  to  return  again  into 
line,  will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three  groups  to  break 
together,  and  for  this  purpose,  will  command:  Four  or 
six  Jiles  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear;  March.  The 
files  desifiuated  will  mark  time  ;  each  rank  will  ad- 
vance a  little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  it,  w-ill  oblique  at 
once,  and  each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four-j 
neighboring  files,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  the' 
movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group,  taking 
care  that  the  distances  are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to 
cause  two  or  three  groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at 
once,  who  turning  to  the  couipany,  will  command: 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

299.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  files  designated 
will  advance  the  inner  shoulder,  move  up  and  form  on 
the  flank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL        153 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the 
guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest 
front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he  will  also 
open  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

'SOI.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed 
in  the  following  order:  the  left  files  as  if  the  company- 
was  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  right  files  as 
if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  left  flank.  Con- 
sequently, whenever  there  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  a 
subdivision,  a  file  which  does  i.ot  belong  to  a  group,  it 
will  be  broken  singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances 
in  column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the 
schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movements  of  this  arti- 
cle w'ith  precision. 

303.  If  new^  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the 
left  or  right  in  obliquing ;  if,  when  files  are  ordered 
into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and 
precision,  in  either  case  the  following  files  will  be  ar- 
rested in  their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the  column 
to  be  lengthened  out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank 
from  which  the  files  are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of 
the  exact  observance  (f  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of 
direction,  in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily 
pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 


11^ 


J 54         fc-CHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  Vf. 

Article  Third. 

To  march  the  column  in  route,  ,<;vrZ  to  execute 


306.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one 
hundred  and  ten  steps  in  a  minute;  this  swiftness  will 
be  hubitually  maintained  in  columns  in  route,  when, 
the  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

307.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  the  route  step, 
Ife  will  command: 

1.   Column, joricard.     2.   Guide,  left  (or  right) 
3.  Route  step.     4.  March. 

308.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  cap- 
tain, the  two  ranks  will  step  ofi'  t<»gether ;  the  rear 
rank  vv^ill  take,  iirmarching,  by  shorteninL':  a  few  steps, 
a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches)  from  the 
rank  preceding,  which  distance  will  be  computed  from 
the  breasts  of  the  men  in  the  reaj.'  rank,  to  the  knap- 
sacks of  the  men  in  the  front  rank.  The  men,  with- 
out further  connnand,  will  immediately  carry  their 
arms  at  ivill,  as  indicated  in  the  school  <tf  the  soldier, 
No.  'i19.  They  will  no  longer  be  required  to  march  in 
the  cadenced  pace,  oi  with  the  same  foot,  or  to  remain 
silent.  The  tiles  will  march  at  ease  ;  but  care  will  be 
taken  to  prevent  the  ranks  from  intermixing,  the  front 
rank  from  getting  in  advance  of  the  guide,  and  the  rear 
rank  from  opening  to  too  great  a  distance. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY -LESSON  VL         155 

30D.  The  company  niarcbing  in  the  route  step,  the 
instructor  will  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will 
be  executed  without  foiinal  commands,  on  a  simple 
Caution  from  the  captain;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up 
to  change  direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front 
rauk  •  Each  rank  will  conform  ittielf,  although  in  tbe 
route  step,  to  the  principles  which  have  been  prescribed 
for  the  change  in  closed  ranks,  with  this  difference 
only;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  taking  steps  of 
r.ine,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear 
the  wlieeling  poiut.       '  "''   '•''  '* 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to 
cause  it  to  pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor 
will  first  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  slrm'- 
der,  and  then  command : 

1.  Close  Order.    2.  March. 

311.  At* the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume 
the  cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  dis- 
tance of  sixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadeneed  pace, 
the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  step,  will 
command : 


1.  Route  Step.    2.  March. 

313.  At  the  command  viarch,  the  front  rank  will 
continue  the  step  of'twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear  rank 
will  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step,  the  distaucc 
of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  front  rauk;  the  men 
will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 


156        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-LESS   N  VL 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step, 
and  the  instructor  should  suppose  the  necessity  of 
marching  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will 
command : 


] ,   Com-pany  by  the  right   (ov  left)  flank.     2.  By  file 
left  Cor  right.)     3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right  (or  left)  in  marching,  ihe  captain  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts  the  lead- 
ing flank;  this  guide  will  wheel  immediately  to  the  left 
or  right ;  all  the  files  will  come  in  successi(»n  to  wheel 
on  the  same  spot  as  the  guide  ;  if  there  be  files  broken 
off"  to  the  rear,  they  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  their  re- 
spective places,  and  follow  the  movement  of  the  com- 
pany. 

316.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to 
be  again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing 
and  diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  commands,  and  the  same  means,  as 
if  the  company  were  marching  in  the  cadenced  step. 
When  the  company  breaks  into  platoons,  the  chief  of 
each  will  move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will 
take  the  place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step  back  into  the 
rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and 
supposed  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  can 
cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and  increased,  by 
section,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or 
more. 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasmg 
front,  by  section,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL         157 

principles  indicated  for  the  same  movements  by  platoon. 
The  right  secti<.ns  of  platoons  will  he  commanded  by 
the  captain  and  first  lieutenant,  respectively  ;  the  left 
sections,  by  the  two  next  subalterns  in  rank,  or,  in  their 
absence,  by  sergeants. 

3 J  9.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section, 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command : 


1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  MARCH. 


320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each 
chief  of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing  flank 
in  the  front  rank,  the  guides  who  will  be  thus  displaced, 
will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank  ;  the  file  closers  will 
close  up  to  within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in 
the  column  in  route,  the  movement  will  never  be  exe- 
cuted in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the  front  of 
the  company. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  pla- 
toons, he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command : 


1.  Form  Platoons.     2.  March. 


323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section 
will  place  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides  will 
pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  command  march,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  for 
forming   company.     The  moment  the    platoons  are 


158         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LKSSON  VI.  ■ 

fonucd,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sections  will  letiiru  tn 
their  places  as  file  closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  .nlso  cause  to  be  executed 
the  diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  files,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  preceding  article,  and  in  the  same  man- 
ner, as  if  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  "When  the 
company  is  broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions  must 
not  be  reduced  to  a  front  of  less  than  six  files,  not 
counting  the  chief  of  tlie  section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by 
section,  the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the 
route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  tlie  same  direction, 
by  the  commands  and  the  means  indicated,  Nos.  314 
and  31.5,  The  moment  the  subdivision.s  shall  face  to 
the  right  (or  lefr,)  the  first  file  of  each  will  wheel  to 
the  left  (or  right,)  in  marching,  to  prolong  the  direc- 
tion, and  to  unite  with  tlie  rear  file  of  the  subdivision 
immediately  preceding.  The  file  closers  will  take  their 
habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  before  the 
union  of  the  subdivisions. 

,S26.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  unduuble  the  files, 
which  might  sometimes  be  found  necessur} ,  he  will  in- 
form the  captain,  who,  after  causing  the  cadenced 
step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  to  be  shouldered  or 
supported,  will  command:  .....\ 

].  In  tiro  7-anks.  undoiihh files.     2.  MARCH. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers 
will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to*  the  left,  will 


SCIIO  ^L  OF  THE  COxMP ANY— LESSON  VI.         159 

place  themselves  promptly  behind  the  odd  nuiiibers  ; 
the  rear  rank  will  j^aiu  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  retake 
the  touch  of  the  elbows  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

328.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
it  will  be  the  even"  numbers  who  will  continue  to  march 
forward  and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  undouble. 

3'29.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the 
files,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command: 


1.  hi  four  ranks,  double  Jilcs.     2.  Maucii. 


oiUi.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  double  in 
the.  manner  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces  by 
tlie  light  or  the  left  flank.  The  instructor  \sill  after- 
wards cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331 .  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  les- 
son roay  be  executed  in  double  quick  time.  The  men 
will  be  bron.ght,  by  degrees,  to .  pass  over  at  this  gait 
about  eleven  hundred  yards  in  seveh  minutes.    • 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step 
shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command 
halt,  and  tlie  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be 
peimitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  they 
shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention  only  to 
holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 


160        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI, 

Article  Fourth. 

Countermarch 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  anJ  supposed  to 
constitute  part  of  a  C(.)lumn,  right  in  Irout,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Countermarch      2.  Company,  right — Face.     3.  By 
file  left.     4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about;  the 
captain  will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause 
two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will  stand 
fast;  the  company  will  step  ofl' smartly  ;  the  first  file, 
conducted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel  around  the  right 
guide,  and  direct  its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as 
to  arrive  behind,  and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide ; 
each  file  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  around  the  right  guide  ;  the  leading  file  having 
arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.    Company.    2.  Halt.      3.  Front.      4.    Right— 
Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four  paces 
from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL        161 

340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the 
right;  the  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside  of  the 
left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the  alignment, 
so  that  the  front  rank  may  be  enclosed  between  the 
two  guides;  the  company  being  aligned,  he  will  com- 
mand Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of 
the  company  as  if  in  column  ;  the  guides  passing  along 
the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  on  the 
right  and  left  of  that  rank. 

341.  In  a  column  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to 
the  same  principles ;  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will 
face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  the  file  on  the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means,  but 
according  to  the  same  principles.  Thus,  the  move- 
ment will  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions, 
if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left 
be  in  front ;  in  both  cases  the  subdivisions  will  wheel 
by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSOxN  VI.        163 

l>ie.sci-ibed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No,  403.  Its 
guide  will  so  direct  bis  inarch  as  to  bring  the  front  rank 
man,  next  on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor  ;  the 
chief  of  the  platoon  will  march  befisre  its  centre  ;  and 
when  its  guides  shall  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
connnand : 

1.  Platoon      2.  Halt. 

349.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  right  of  the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the 
distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the  pla- 
toon will  halt ;  the  files  not  yet  in  line,  will  come  up 
promptly.  The  guide  w^ill  throw  himself  on  the  line  ot 
battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  pla- 
toon ;  he  will  face  to  the  instructor,  who  wmII  align  him 
on  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left.  The  chief  of  pla- 
toon having*,  at  the  same  time,  gone  to  the  point  where 
the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will,  as  soon  as  he 
sees  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in  line,  command  : 

Right — Dress 

350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  w^ill  align  itself;  the 
front  rank  m  ui,  w-lio  finds  himself  opposite  to  the 
guide,  wil!  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm 
ofthis  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from  the 
right,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first;  it  will  then  turn  to  the  r-ght 
at  the  Ciuiimand  of  its  chief,  and  march  towaidsthe 
line  of  battle,  its  guide  directing  himself  on  the  left  file 
of  the  first  platoQu.  , 


164         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL 

352.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will 
be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first ;  at  the  instant  it 
halts,  its  guide  will  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  left  files,  of  his  platoon,  and 
will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  -chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its 
files  in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on  the  direction, 
will  command : 

Right — Dress. 

354.  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to 
his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left  ;  the 
second  platoon  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment  of 
the  firs-t,  and,  when  established,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — POSTS. 


356.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return 
to  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoons,  left  in  front,  will  form 
on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and,  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  se- 
cond platoon  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  re- 
ciprocally. The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
aligned  it,  from  the  point  of  appui,  (the  left,)  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL        1C5 

retire  to  bis  place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain  having 
halted  the  first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the  line  of 
battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point  to  align  this  platoon, 
and  then  command  :  Front.  At  the  command, guides 
— posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the  captain  will  shift 
to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take  their* places 
in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be 
exercised,  at  the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, the  colonel  will  indicate  the  lesson  or  lessons 
they  are  severally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  com- 
mence by  a  bugle  signal,  and  terminate  in  like  man- 
ner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  tico  ranks  into 
single  ra-nk,  and  reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in 
the  manner  indicated  No.  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and 
supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  or  left  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
single  rank,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.     2.  March. 

360.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face 
to  the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank. 

362.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  same  time  with 
the  guide  ;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right  at 
the  first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed 
by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  come  to  turn 


166         SCHOOL  OF  TIIE  COMPANY-LESSON  VI. 

on  the  same  spot  where  he  had  turned.  The  second 
file,  and  successively  all  the  other  file^,  will  step  off 
as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  the  front  rank  man 
of  each  file  following  immediately  the  rear  rank  man 
of  theiile  next  on  his  right.  The  captain  will  super- 
intend the  moTcment,  and  when  the  last  man  shall 
have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt  the  company,  and  face  it 
to  the  front.  .  .    ' 

ii.i.i    ■■h,'    !■;:■-(  ■■.'•. •!(  ..Ml... 

3G3.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  j^laces  in  line  of 
buttle,  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

3G-i.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
couimaiid : 


1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Company 
right — Face.    3.  March. 


3G5.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  right ;  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  the 
right  will  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

3GC.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have 
faced  to  the  right,  will  step  viY,  and  form  files  in  the 
following  manner:  the  second  num  in  the  rank  will 
place  himself  behind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file  ;  the 
third  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  first  in  the 
front  rank  ;  the  fourth  behind  the  third  in  the  rear 
rank.  All  others  will,  in  like  manner,  place  them- 
slves,  alternately,  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and  \\  ill 
thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on  the  left  of  those  already 
formed. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.        1G7 

3G7.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitu- 
ally executed  by  the  right  of  companies ;  but  wht-u 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  theui  executed  by  the 
left,  he  will  face  the  company  about,  and  post  the 
guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

36S.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  movement  commencing 
with  the  left  file,  now  become  the  right,  and  in  each 
file  by  the  rear  rank  man,  now  become  the  front ;  the 
left  guide  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  right. 

i]uD.  The  furma/tiou  ended,  the  instructor  will  face 
the  company  to  its  pmper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either 
of  the  formations  above  described,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies,  and  will  then  give  the  commands  just  pre- 
scribed for  the  instructor.  Each  company  will  execute 
the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  tico  ranks 
into  four,  and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and 
in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a 
halt,  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  right  in 
front,  w^hen  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
four  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.  2.  Company  left — 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.J 

372.  At  the  scond  command,  the  left  guide  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to 


168         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VL 

the  left;  the  rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  one 
pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  K-ft  and 
rear,  and  the  men  will  form  into  four  ranks  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  will  reface  to  the  front  without  undoubling.  All 
the  other  files  of  four  will  step  off,  and  closing  succes- 
sively to  about  five  inches  of  the  i/i-eceding  file,  will 
halt,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front,  the  men  re- 
maining doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in 
line  of  battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  M  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command : 

1.  In  two   ranks,  form  company.     2.  Compamj  right 
Face.    3.  March  Cor  double  quick— Makgii.) 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will 
stand  fast,  the  company  will  fiice  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off  at  the 
same  time,  the  other  files  standing  fast ;  the  second 
file  will  step  off  when  there  shall  be  between  it  and 
the  first  space  suflftcient  to  form  into  two  ranks. 
The  following  files  will  execute  successively  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As  soon  as  the  last 
file  shall  have  its  distance,  the  instructor  will  com 
mand : 


SCIIO.'L  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI.  169 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 


879.  At  the  comnViWid  front,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and 
marching  to  the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command : 


1.  In  four  ranks,  form  coynpany.     2.  By  the  left,  double 
files.     3.  'MA.Riiw  {ov  double  quick — March.) 


381.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march 
straight  to  the  front ;  the  company  will  make  a  half 
face  to  the  left,  the  odd  numbers  placing  themselves 
behind  the  even  numbers.  The  even  numbers  of  the 
rear  rank  will  shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit  the 
odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  to  get  between  them 
and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The  files  thus 
formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to 
march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as 
to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide;  each  file  will 
close  successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left,  and  when 
at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face  to  the 
front  by  a  half  fiiee  to  the  right,  and  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  left. 

382.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in 
four  ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  command : 

12* 


170  S(;iIOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 

1.  In  two  ranks,  fonn  company.     2.  By  the  right,  7tn- 
double  files .     3.  %iARCU  (ov  double  quick — Makch.) 

• 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight 
to  the  front ;  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to 
the  right  and  march  obliquely,  lengthening  the  i<tep  a 
little,  in  order  to  keep,  as  near  as  possible,  abreast  of 
the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  second  file  from  the  left 
shall  have  gained  to  the  right  the  interval  necessary 
for  the  left  file  to  form  into  two  ranks,  the  second  file 
will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  left  and 
march  straight  forward  ;  the  left  file  will  immediately 
form  into  two  ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  left.  Each  file  will  execute  successively,  w^hat 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  the  left, 
and  each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks  when  the  file 
next  on  its  right  has  obliqued  the  required  distance 
and  fiiced  to  the  front. 


384.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  a 
column,  left  in  front,  these  dilferent  movements  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right. 


END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

General  principles   and    division    of  the   in- 
striiction. 


1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  he  sub- 
jected to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the 
means  of  moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the  great- 
est promptitude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should 
be  executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed 
ranks,  nor  is  it  desirable,  as  such  exactness  would 
materially  interfere  with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the 
way  for,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of,  the  main  corps, 
their  movements  should  be  so  regulated  by  this  corps, 
as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  re- 
serve, the  strength  and  composition  of  which  will  vary 
according  to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  dis 
tance  of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserve  will  be 
sufficient  for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to 
fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with  cartridges,  re- 
lieve the  fatigued,  and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for  the 
shirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  c(U'ps  be  at  a  considerable  distance, 
besides  the  company  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be 
required,  composed  of  entire  companies,  which  will  be 
employed  to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the 
line  as  may  be  warmly  attacked;  this  reserve  should 
he  strong  enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies 
deployed  as  skirmishers. 

(171) 


17-2  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

7.  The  reserve  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  the  company  reserves  at  one 
hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at  four 
liundred  paces.  This  rule,  however,  is  not  invariable. 
The  reservei^,  while  holding  themselves  within  sustain- 
ing distance  of  the  line,  should  be,  as  much  as  possi- 
ble, in  position  to  aiford  each  other  mutual  protection, 
and  must  carefully  profit  by  any  accidents  of  the 
ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the 
enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed 
in  quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be  re- 
sorted to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their 
pieces  in  the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  hubitually  indicated  by 
the  sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commis- 
sioned ofiicers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  commands 
to  be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are  given;  but  to  avoid 
mistakes  when  the  signals  are  employed,  they  will 
wait  until  the  last  bugle  note  is  sounded  before  com- 
mencing the  movement. 

12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  ra- 
pidly, the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will 
see  that  the  men  economise  their  strength,  keep 
cool,  and  profit  by  all  the  advantages  which  the  ground 
may    offer    for    cover.       It    is    only    by    this    con- 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  173 

tinual  watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all  grades,  that  a 
line  of  skirmishers  can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction   will  be  divided  into  Ave  arti- 
cles, and  subdivided  as  follows : 


Article  First. 

1.  To  deploy  forward. 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank. 
'i.  To  extend  intervals. 

4.  To  close  intervcils. 

5.  To  relieve  skirmishers, 

Article  Second. 

1.  To  advance  in  line. 

2.  To  retreat  in  line. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

Article  Third. 

1.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

2.  To  fire  marching. 

Article   Fourth. 

1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction. 

3.  The  assembly. 


]74  instruction  for  skirmishers. 

Article  Fifth. 


1.  To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the 
movements  are  executed  .by  a  company  deployed  us 
skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the  battalion 
in  order  of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed 
that  each  company  of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  occupies  a  front  of  one  hundred  paces. 
From  these  two  examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for  all 
cases,  whatever  may  be  the  numerical  strength  of  the 
skirmishers,  and  the  extent  of  ground  they  ought  to 
occupy. 


Article   First. 
Deployments. 


15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in 
two  ways  :  forward,  and  by  the  flank. 

16.  The  deployment  forward  aviII  be  adopted  when 
the  company  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  es- 
tablished as  skirmishei-s  :  it  will  be  deployed  by  the 
flank,  when  it  finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each 
platoon  will  be  sul)divided  into  two  sections  ;  the  com- 
rades in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  inen,  will  be 
careful  to  know  and  to  sustain  each  other.     The  cap 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  175 

tain  will  assure  himself  that  the  files  in  the  centre  of 
each  platoon  and  section  are  designated. 


IS.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on 
its  right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other  named  file 
whatsoever.  In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may  be 
thrown  forward  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  ou 
any  ground  they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 


19.  A  chain  ofskirmishers  ought  generally  to  preserve 
their  alignment,  but  no  advantages  which  the  ground 
may  present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain  this  regu- 
larity. 


20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on 
the  extent  of  ground  to  be  covered  ;  but  in  general,  it 
is  not  pniper  that  thf  groups  offour  men  should  be  re- 
moved more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
habitual  distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in 
open  grounds  will  be  five  paces;  in  no  case  will  they 
lose  sight  of  each  other. 


21.  The  fr</nt  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion 
conipreliends  its  front  and  the  half  of  each  interval 
which  sepii rates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right  and 
left.  If  a  line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported,  should 
be  covered  by  skirmishers,  it  will  be  necessary  either  to 
protect  the  flanks  with  skirmishers,  or  to  extend  them 
in  front  of  the  line  so  tarJ*eyond  the  wings  as  effectu- 
ally to  oppose  any  attempt  which  might  be  made  by 
the  enemy's  skirmishers  to  disturb  the  flanks. 


176  INSTRUCTLON  FOR  SKIRMISIIKRS, 

To  deploy  forward. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when 
the  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left 
file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  platoon  iu 
reserve,  he  will  command : 

1.  First  pi  at  00)1 — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind 
the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of  the  first  pla- 
toon ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  i>;u-e  in  front  <tf 
the  centre  of  the  first  phitoon,  and  will  place  hiuiself 
between  the  two  sections  in  the  front  rank  iis  soon  as  the 
movement  begins  ;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
self on  the  left  ofthe  front  rank  of  the  same  platt)on,  as 
soon  as  he  can  pass.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  this 
sergeant  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct 
his  march.  The  first  lieutenant,  placing  himself  before 
the  centre  of  the  second  platoon,  will  command  : 

Second  platoon  hacJucard — March. 

24.  At  this  couimand,  the  second  platoon  will  step 
three  paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the  flank  of 
the  first  platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted  by  its  chief, 
and  the  second  sergeant  wil^place  himself  on  the  left, 
and  the  third  sergeant  on  the  right  flank  of  this  pla- 
toon. 


^^jy 


.:a 


r^> 


,;.4 

INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  177 

25.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four 
men,  conducted  by  the  f«turtli  sergeant,  will  direct  it- 
self on  the  point  indicated;  all  the  other  groups  of 
fours  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will 
move  diagonally  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so 
as  to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  twenty  paces,  which 
shall  be  the  distance  between  each  group  and  that  im- 
mediately on  its  left.  When  the  second  group  from 
the  left  shnll  arrive  on  a  line  with,  and  twenty  paces 
from  the  first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  con- 
forming to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  first,  keeping 
constantly  on  the  game  alignment  and  at  twenty  paces 
from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others,  will  con- 
form to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second; 
they  will  ariive  successively  on  the  line.  The  right 
guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where 
the  left  of  the  line  should  rest,  the  captain  vv'ill  com- 
mand the  skirmishers  to  halt;  the  men  composing  each 
group  of  fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at  five 
paces  frimi  each  other,  and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the 
h'out  rank  man  of  the  even  file  in  each  group,  the  rear 
rank  men  placing  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  file 
leaders.  If  any  groups  be  not  in  line  at  the  command 
halt,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conforming  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be 
fired  upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the 
groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  theit  properdis- 
tauces. 

23.  The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned 
officers  on  the  right,  left  and  centre  of  the  platoon  will 


178  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  ami  op- 
posite the  positions  they  respectively  occupied.  The 
chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregulari- 
ties, and  then  place  themselves  twenty-five  or  thirty 
paces  in  reai-  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  each  hav- 
ing with  him  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve,  and  also 
a  bugler  wlio  will  repeat,  if  necessary,  the  signals 
sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed  to 
take  advantage  of  any  cover  which  the  ground  may 
offer,  and  should,  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever  such 
a  movement  is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  fire 
of  the  enemy.  Regularity  in  the  alignment  should 
yield  to  this  important  advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  face  the  second  platoon  about, r\u(\  march  it  prompt- 
ly, and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one  liundred  and 
fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will 
hold  it  always  at  this  distance,  unless  ordered  to  the 
contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  line.      This  rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually 
in  the  scabbard,  and  this  rule  applies  equally  to  the 
skirmishers  and  the  reserve  ;  whenever  bayonets  are 
required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  bo  given. 
The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the 
whole  de|)]oym('iit,  and  then  promptly  place  himself 
about  eighty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  t)f  the  line.  He 
wall  have  with  him  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken  from 
the  reserve. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  1T9 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or 
the  centre  of  the  phitoon,  by  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  right  or  centre,  for  that  of  trft 
file. 


34.  The  deph)ymentonthe  right  or  the  centre  will 
be  made  accordilig  to  the  principles  prescribed  above : 
in  this  latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  be 
marked  by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  sec- 
tion ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  right 
of  this  group,  and  serve  as  the  guidt^  of  the  platoon 
during  the  deploymeiit. 

• 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made, 
on  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of 
fours  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other, 
and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered 
file.  The  deployments  will  habitually  be  made  at 
twenty  paces  interval ;  but  if  a  greater  interval  be  re- 
quired, it  will  be  indicated  in  the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers, 
so  near  the  main  body  as  ta  render  a  reserve  unneces- 
sary, the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the  same 
manner,  and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for 
the  deployment  of  a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third 
lieutenant  will  command  the  fourth  section,  and  a 
nou-commisf<ioiied  officer  designated  for  that  purpose, 
the  second  section  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as 
centre  guide  ;  the  file  closers  will  place  themselves 
ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  their  places 
in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second  lieutenant  will 
each  have]a  bugler  near  him. 


ISO  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

To  deploy  hy  tlic  fiank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  bait,  wben  tbe  cap- 
tain shall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  Hank,  holding  the 
first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.    2,  Bij   the   right 
flank — take  intervals.     3.  Marcii  (or  double  quick 
— March.) 

38.  At  the  firs^t  command,  the  first  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces 
behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and  second  sections  of 
the  second  platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
self one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  pla- 
toon ;  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will 
place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
same  platoon.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  him  the 
point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.  The 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  Nos.  23 
and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant  will  remain 
on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind  the 
left  group  of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement ;  the 
left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  as 
soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what 


rvr.  .nn^spr,  ^rS^r^'vf  t:^  y.,'^;T,T7; 


^M^ 


%t     U 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  181 

has  been  prescribed  No.  26 ;  the  third  sergeant  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  group,  to  con- 
duct it ;  the  second  group  will  halt  at  twenty  paces 
from  the  one  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at  twenty 
paces  from  the  second,  and  Ho  on  to  the  right.  As  the 
groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy 
as  has  been  explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  successive  deployments  of  the  groups, 
keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as  to  rectify 
any  errors  which  may  be  committed.  When  the  de- 
ployment is  completed,  they  will  place  themselves 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  as 
has  been  heretofore  prescribed.  The  non-commissioned 
officers  will  also  place  themselves  as  previously  in- 
dicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move 
it  as  indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank 
according  to  the  same  principles,  substituting  left 
flank  for  right  flank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  com- 
pany upon  the  centre  of  one  of  the  platoons,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right 
and  left  flanks — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  dou- 
ble quick — March.  ) 

45.  At  .the  first  cfmimand,  the  officers  and  uon-com- 
missioned  officers  will  conform  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed No.  38. 


182  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

46.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  place  liim.self  behind  the  loft  group  (»f  the  right 
section  of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant  be- 
hind the  right  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same 
platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to  the  left,  the 
group  on  the  right  t)f  this  latter  section  will  stand  fast. 
The  two  sections  will  move  off  in  opposite  directions: 
the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
right  file  to  conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant  on  the 
right  of  the  left  file.  The  two  groups  nearest  that 
which  stands  fast,  will  each  halt  at  twenty  paces  from 
this  group,  and  each  of  the  other  groups  will  halt 
at  twenty  paces  from  the  group  which  is  in  rear 
of  it.  Each  group  will  deploy  as  heretofore  prescribed 
No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the 
movement  holding  themselves  always  abreast  of  the 
group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be 
made  on  any  named  group  whatsoever ;  in  this  case, 
the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the 
group  indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  be  mads  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  heretofore  prescribed. 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles. 


To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend 
a  line  of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  fur  deployments. 


I 
INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  18L 

52.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  Hue  of  skirmishers  is 
at  a  halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to 
the  left,  he  will  commaud  : 


1.  By  the  leftflanh  (so  many  paces)  extend  interval. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

53.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right 
will  stand  fast,  all  the  other  i^roups  \\'ill  face  to  the 
left,  and  each  group  will  extend  its  interval  to  the 
prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated  No.  40.  J 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  topre- 
servo  between  each  other  the  distance  of  five  paces, 
unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render  it  nec- 
essary that  they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in 
sight  of  each  other.  The  intervals  refer  to  the  spaces 
between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the  distances  between 
the  men  in  each  group.  The  intervals  will  be  taken 
from  the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neighboring  group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the 
front,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the 
right,  he  will  command  : 


1.  On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals. 
2.  March  (or  doublequick — March.) 

56.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  march  on  the  point  of  direction  ;  the  other 
groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and  tak- 
ing the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals 
to  the  prescribed  distance,  by  the  means  indicated 
No.  25,  conforming  also  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 


184  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  ou  the  centre  of  the 
line  according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If,  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that  one 
company  or  platoon  should  occupy  a  line  which  had 
been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  of  the  com- 
pany or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  successively 
to  the  rear  as  they  are  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the 
intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 


59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  thecap- 
t.iin  should  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the  left,  he  will 
command. 


1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  close    intervals. 
2.  March  for  double  quick— March.) 

61.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  will  stand 
fast,  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left  and  close 
to  the  prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to  the 
enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  cap- 
tain will  command : 


1.   On  the  left  group   (so  many  paces)  close  intervals. 
2.  March  Cor  double  quick— Mmicu.) 


/(f^. 


p.2<^- 


Ri 

1; 


to  • 

•  ■ 


B        • 


t 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  185 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously  indi- 
cated ;  the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right  shoulder, 
will  close  to  Ihe  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced 
to  the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the 
centre,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to 
reinforce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two  com- 
panies to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  previously 
occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy  so  as 
to  finish  its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men  will  successively  move 
upon  that  line,  as  they  shall  be  unmasked  by  the  men 
of  the  old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two  companies 
will  unite  behind  the  centre  of  the  line. 


To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skir?nishcrs. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  bereliev-. 
ed,  the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  intention,  which 
he  will  immediately  communicate  to  his  first  and  se- 
cond lieutenants. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment 
forward,  so  as  to  finish  the_ movement  at  about  twenty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new 
company,  by  command  of  their  captain,  will  advance 
rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt ;  the 
new  line  being  established,  the  old  company  will  as- 
semble on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get  into 
groups  of  fours  until  they  are  beyond  the  fire  of  the 
enemy.  / 

13*  / 


186  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

69.  If  tho  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  inarching 
in  retreat,  the  company  thrown  out  to  relieve  them 
will  deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed  No.  38  and  fol- 
lowing. The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire 
with  order,  and  having  passed  the  new  line,  they  will 
form  upon  the  reserve. 


Article   Second. 

To  advance. 
To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers is  marching  by  the  front,  the  guide  will  be  ha- 
bitually in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication  to  this 
effect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  on  the 
contrary  it  be  intended  that  the  directing  guide  should 
be  on  the  right,  or  left,  the  command  guide  right,  or 
guide  Ir/t,  will  be  given  immediately  after  that  of 
forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers 
to  advance,  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  MARCH  (or  double  quick — 
March.) 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  great- 
est rapidity  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  in  case  of 
need  by  the  sergeants.  This  rule  is  general,  whether 
the  skirmishers  march- by  the  front  or  by  the  flank. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  187 

73.  At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will  move 
briskly  on  the  line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the  second 
on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  move  to 
the  front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction  will 
move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skirmishers 
will  hold  themselves  aligned  on  this  guide,  and  pre- 
serve their  intervals  towards  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately 
behind  their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their  move- 
ments. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence 
to  the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he 
will  command : 


Halt. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line 
will  halt.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals,  and  af- 
ter taking  every  possible  advantage  which  the  ground 
may  offer  for  protecting  the  men,  they,  with  the  three 
sergeants  in  the  line,  will  retire  to  their  proper  places 
in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers 
in  retreat,  will  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.    2.  March  (or  dottble  quick — 
March.) 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
move  on  the  line  as  prescribed  No.  73. 


18S  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will 
face  about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear,  con- 
forming to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exer- 
tion to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat, 
the  captain  will  command  : 

Halt. 

84.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt,  and 
immediately  face  to  the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides 
will  each  conform  himselftow^hat  is  prescribed  No.  78. 

To  change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Right  wheel.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March  ) 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
mark  time  in  his  place ;  the  left  guide  will  move  in  a 
circle  to  the  right,  and  that  he  may  properly  regulate 
his  movements,  will  occasionally  cast  his  eyes  to  the 
right,  so  as  to  observe  the  direction  of  the  line,  and 
the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  passed  over.  The  centre 
guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  in 
order  to  conform  his  movements  to  the  general  direc- 
tion, will  take  care  that  his  steps  are  only  half  the 
length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on  the  left. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  189 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their 
steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank,  being 
less  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as  they 
are  removed  trom  it ;  they  will  often  look  to  the  march- 
ing flank,  so  as  to  preserve  the  direction  and  their  in- 
tervals. 

89.  When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to 
resume  the  direct  march,  he  will  command : 

1.  Foricard.     2.  MARCH. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to 
wheel,  and  the  skirmishers  will  move  direct  to  the 
front ;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point  which 
will  be  indicated  to  him 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in 
place  of  moving  it  to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by  the  same 
commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance  ;  for  ex- 
ample, if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left,  now 

j  become  the  right,  he  will  command:  1.  Left  wheel, 

I  2.  March.     At  the  command  halt,  the  skirmishers 

\  will  face  to  the  enemy. 

i  95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain 
should  wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will, 
when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  suflftciently,  com- 
mand : 


190  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  In  retreat. 

2.  March. 

To  march  hy  iJie  fianh. 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  march 
by  the  right  flank,  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  flank. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

97.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
place  themselves  on  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command ?HorcA,  the  skirnjislicrs  will  face 
to  the  right  and  move  otF;  the  right  guide  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  on  the  right  to 
conduct  him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  indicated  ; 
each  skirmisher  will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the 
direction  of  the  one  immediately  preceding  him,  and 
to  preserve  his  distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left 
flank,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right ;  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  by  the  sideof  the  leading  man 
to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  then),  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Halt. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  191 

101.  At  this  commaud,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and 
fac«  to  the  enemy.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  con- 
form to  wh  it  has  been  prescribed  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements 
of  the  line,  and  be  heldalvva^^s  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to  second  its 
operations. 

103.  "When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command:  1.  Platoon 
foricard.  2.  Guide  left.  3.  March.  If  he  should 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command:  1.  In 
retreat.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  right.  At  the  com- 
mand halt,  it  w'ill  re-face  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that 
the  signals  or  commands,  such  as  foricard,  mean  that 
the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy;  in  retreat, 
that  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  orleftjlank,  that 
the  men  must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  w^hatever  may  be 
their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the 
right  (or  left,)  lie  will  command:  1.  By  file  right  (or 
left.)  2.  March.  These  movements  will  also  be  ex- 
ecuted by  the  signals  Nos.  14  and  ]5. 

Article  Third. 

The  firings. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  march- 
ing. 


192  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


To  fire  at  a  halt. 


107.  To  cause  this  firo  to  be  executed,  the  captain 
will  command  : 


Commence — Firing. 


108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men 
of  the  front  rank  will  commence  firing ;  they  will  re- 
load rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  tire 
again.  During  this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will 
come  to  a  ready,  and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file 
leaders  have  loaded,  they  will  nlso  fire  and  I'eload.  The 
men  of  each  file  will  thus  continue  the  firing,  conform- 
ing to  this  principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other  shall  al- 
ways have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to 
aim  with  accuracy ;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor 
to  estimate  correctly  the  distances  between  themselves 
and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  de- 
liver their  fire  with  the  greater  certainty  of  success 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  reloading,  unless  protected  by  accidents  in  the 
ground. 

To  fire  marcliing. 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands as  the  fire  at  a  halt. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing,  if  the  line  be 
advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt, 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  193 

fire,  and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward.  The 
rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march, 
and  after  passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front 
rank  man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object, 
and  fire  when  his  front  rank  man  has  loaded ;  the  fire 
will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by  each  file ;  the 
skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and  endeavor,  as  much  as 
possible,  to  preserve  the  general  direction  of  the  align- 
ment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  com- 
mand commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file 
will  halt,  face  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and  then  reload  whilst 
moving  to  the  rear ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file 
will  continue  to  march,  and  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces 
beyond  his  front  rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready, 
and  fire,  when  his  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  re- 
treat and  loaded;  after  which,  he  will  move  to  the  rear 
and  reload ;  the  front  rank  man  in  his  turn,  after  march- 
ing bi'iskly  to  the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten  or  twelve  paces 
from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the  enemy,  load  his  piece 
and  fire,  conforming  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  ; 
the  firing  will  thus  be  continued. 

1 14.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  fiank, 
at  the  command,  commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one  pace  for- 
ward, halt,  and  fire;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue 
to  move  forv\ard.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has 
fired,  he  will  place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank 
man  and  reload  Avhilst  marching.  When  he  has  loaded, 
the  rear  rank  man  will  in  his  turn,  step  one  pace  for- 
ward, halt,  and  fire,  and  returning  to  the  ranks,  will 
place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  man;  the  latter,  in 


194  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner,  observing  the 
same  principles.  At  the  command,  cease  firing,  the 
men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake  their  original  posi- 
tions, if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
the  fire  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, but  in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear  rank  men 
who  will  fire  first. 

116.  The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in  the  cases 
to  which  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Foricord — March, 
it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded,  without  re- 
gard to  the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong,  who 
will  move  to  the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces  have 
been  discharged,  will  remain  in  their  i)laces  to  load 
them  before  moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will  be 
continued  agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No. 
112. 

118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing, 
or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  In 
retreat — March,  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded, 
will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire  in  this  po- 
sition ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  re- 
treat loading  them,  and  the  fire  will  be  continued  agree- 
ably to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at 
a  halt,  advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  By 
the  right  (or left)  flank — MARCH,  the  men  whisse  pieces 
are  loaded,  will  step  one  jjace  out  of  the  genera; 
alignment,  face  to  the  enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position  1 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  195 

the  men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face  to  the 
right  (or left)  and  march  in  the  direction  indicated.  The 
men  who  stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place  them- 
selves, immediately  after  firing,  upon  the  general  di- 
rection, and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank  men,  as 
the  case  may  be.  The  fire  will  be  continued  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  134. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their 
pieces  whilst  marching  ;  but  they  will  be  enjoined  to 
halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charging 
cartridge,  and  priming. 

121 .  They  should  be  practised  to  fire  and  load  kneel- 
ing, lying  down,  and  sitting,  and  much  liberty  should 
be  allowed  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that  they  may 
be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be  most  convenient. 
Skirmishers  should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in 
whatever  position  they  may  load,  it  is  important  that 
the  piece  should  be  placed  upright  before  rauiming,  in 
order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder  may  reach  the 
bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same 
rank  shoul.I  not  all  fire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the 
same  file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the  other  of 
them  be  always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skir- 
mishers should  seize  on  every  advantage  which  the 
ground  may  present,  for  arresting  the  enemy  as  long 
as  possible. 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cease  firing,  the  captain  will 
see  that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed  ;  but  the  men 
who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load  If  the  line  be 
marching,  it  will  continue  the  movement;  but  the  man 
of  each  file  who  happens  to  be  in  front,  will  wait  until 
the  man  in  rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him. 


196  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing,  at 
the  command  halt,  the  line  will  re-form  upon  the  skir- 
mishers who  are  in  front;  when  the  line  is  retreating, 
upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

126.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possi- 
ble vigilance  over  a  line  of  skirmishers;  in  battle,  they 
should  neither  carry  a  rifle  or  fowling  piece.  In  all 
the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  see 
that  order  and  silence  are  preserved,  and  that  the 
skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently  ;  they  should 
especially  caution  them  to  be  calm  and  collected  ;  not 
to  fire  until  they  distinctly  perceive  the  objects  at 
which  they  aim,  and  are  sure  that  those  objects  are 
within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take  ad- 
vantage promptly,  and  with  intelligence,  of  all  shelter, 
and  of  all  accidents  of  the  ground,  to  conceal  them- 
selves from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  protect 
themselves  from  his  fire.  It  may  often  happen,  that  in- 
tervals are  momentarily  lost  when  several  men  near 
each  other  find  a  common  shelter  ;  but  when  they  quit 
this  position,  they  shouldimmediately  resume  their  in- 
tervals and  their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may  not, 
by  crowding,  needlessly  expose  themselves  to  the  fire 
of  the  enemy. 


*>'_ ■-JLSL.. 


'  ■■■\ 


.¥%" 


e  AsnauJicfssiHed 


•                   .."" 

..II-         I 

M  . 

ft 

1 

i 

L.             ■     ' 

^i^' 

! 
1 

i 

! 

INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  1  9* 

Article  Fourth. 


THE    RALLY. 


To  form  column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied 
in  order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success ;  the 
rallies  are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets  fixed ; 
when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix  bayonets 
without  command. 

128.  There  are  several  w\ays  of  rallying,  which 
the  chiefs  of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  circum- 
stances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely 
disturbed  by  scattered  horsemen,  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the  captain  will 
cause  bayonet  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should, 
however,  advance  to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the  cap- 
tain will  command,  rfl%%/o?4rs.  The  line  will  halt 
if  marching,  and  the  four  men  of  each  group  will  ex- 
ecute this  rally  in  the  following  manner :  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file  will  take  the  po- 
sition i>i guard  against  cavalry;  the  rear  rank  man  of 
the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take  the  position  of 
guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to  him,  his 
right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of  the 
former,  and  parallel  to  it ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the 
odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file,  will 
also  place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  pc- 
sition,  and  between  the  two  men  already  established, 
facing  to  the  right  and  left ;  the  right  feet  of  the  four 


198  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

men  will  be  brought  together,  forming  a  square,  and 
serving  for  mutual  support.  The  four  men  in  each 
group  will  come  to  a  ready,  fire  as  occasion  mAy  of- 
fer, and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

130.  The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each 
cause  the  four  men  who  constitute  his  guard  to  form 
square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him  and  the 
bugler  to  place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The  three 
sergeants  will  each  promptly  place  himself  in  the 
group  nearest  him  in  the  line  of  skirmishers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares 
too  weak,  but  should  wish  to  hold  his  position  by 
strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command: 


Rally  by  sections. 


132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
move  rapidly  on  the  Centre  group  of  their  respective 
sections,  or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose  position 
might  offer  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  advantage; 
the  skirmishers  will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run  on  this 
group,  and  without  distinction  of  numbers.  The  men 
composing  the  group  on  which  the  formation  is  made, 
will  immediately  form  square,  as  heretofore  explained, 
and  elevate  their  pieces,  the  bayonets  uppermost,  in 
order  to  indicate  the  point  on  which  the  rally  is  to  be 
made.  The  other  skirmishers,  as  they  arrive,  will  oc- 
cupy and  fill  the  open  angular  spaces  between  these 
four  men,  and  successively  rally  around  the  first  nucleus, 
and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  199 

circle.  The  skirmishers  will  take  as  they  arrive,  the 
position  of  charge  bayonets,  the  point  of  the  bayonet 
more  elevated,  and  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  posi- 
tion. The  movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior 
ranks  will  fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without 
moving  their  feet. 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard, 
wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to 
observe  that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence,  and  with 
promptitude  and  order;  that  some  pieces  in  each  of 
their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the 
fire  is  directed  on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be 
most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will 
form  into  a  circle  around  its  chief 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of 
skirmishers  formed  of  many  platoons,  should  judge 
that  the  rally  by  sections  does  not  offer  sufficient  re- 
sistance, he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  ex- 
ecuted, and  for  this  purpose,  he  will  command: 


Rally  by  platoons. 


-  137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  means,  as  the 
rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform 
to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 
138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers 
on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 


2G0  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move 
briskly  on  the  reserve  ;  the  officer  who  commands  it 
W'ill  take  immediate  steps  to  form  sc^uare  ;  for  this 
purpose,  he  will  cause  the  half  sections  on  the  flanks 
to  be  thrown  perpendicularly  to  the  rear;  he  will  or- 
der the  men  to  come  to  a  ready. 

140  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the 
run,  will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon  that  man 
of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the  section. 
These  groups  will  direct  themselves  dioganally  to- 
wards each  other,  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  into 
sections  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  while  mov- 
ing to  the  rear;  the  officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that 
this  formation  is  made  in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs 
will  direct  their  sections  upon  the  reserve,  taking  care 
to  unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left.  As  the  skirmishers 
arrive,  they  will  continue  and  complete  the  formation 
of  the  square  begun  by  the  reserve,  closmg  in  rapidly 
upon  the  latter,  without  regard  to  their  places  in  line; 
they  will  come  to  a  ready  without  command,  and  fire 
upon  the  enemy  ;  which  will  also  be  done  by  the  re- 
serve as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  by  the  skirmishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cav- 
alry while  retreating,  its  chief  will  command  halt;  at 
this  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a  com- 
pact circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his 
section  and  resume  the  march,  the  moment  he  can  do 
so  with  safety. 

142.  The   formation  of  the   square'  in  a  prompt 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  201 

aiidefficlentmanner,  requires coolnfess and  activity  on 
the  part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment 
of  respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him; 
as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself 
beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a 
position  where  he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage, 
or  by  retu ruing  to  the  corps  to  which  he  belongs.  For 
this  purpose,  being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the  com- 
pany to  break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half  dis- 
tance ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Forin  column.    2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  marc/t,  each  platoon  will  dress 
on  its  centre,  and  the  platoon  which  was  facing  to  the 
rear  will  fiice  about  without  command.  The  guides 
will  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their 
respective  platoons,  those  of  the  second  platoon  will 
place  themselvesathalf  distance  from  those  of  the  first, 
counting  from  the  rear  rank.  These  dispositions  being 
made,  the  captain  can  move  the  column  in  whatever 
direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will 
command : 


1.  Inretreai.     2.  MARCH  (or  double  quick- 
March.) 


146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  imme- 
diately face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the  oppo- 
14* 


202  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

site  direction.     As  soon  as  the  column  is  in  iuotion> 
the  captain  will  command  : 

3.  Guide  right  (or  left.) 

147.  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading 
guide  ;  the  guides  will  march  at  their  proper  distances, 
and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain 
will  command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  MARCH. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt ; 
the  first  platoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer 
half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown  perpendic- 
ularly to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third 
fronts  of  the  square.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will 
promptly  rectify  any  irregularities  which  may  be  com- 
mitted. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  ad- 
vance, the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  MARCH. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  144. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will 
command : 

1.    Forward.    2.  MAncn  {or  dotihlc  quick— March.) 
3.   Guide  left  (or  right.) 

153.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRxMISilERS.  203 

forward,  and  at  the  third  conimaud,  the  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

J54.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain 
ground  to  the  right  or  left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid 
wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and  for  this  pur- 
pose, will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  nec- 
essary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half 
distance,  right  in  front,  the  captain  can  deploy  the 
first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already  ex- 
plained ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the  se- 
cond platoOn  forward  on  the  centre  file,  leaving  the 
first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command: 


1.  Second  j)latoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  On  the  centre 
fie — take  intervals.  3.  March  (ot  double  quick — 
March.) 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  pla- 
toon will  caution  his  platoon  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs 
of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves 
before  the  centre  of  their  sections  ;  the  fifth  sergeant 
will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chieSof  the  right 
section,  second  platoon,  will  command:  Sectionright 
face;  the  chief  of  the  left  section  :  Section  left  face. 

l.'iS.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will 
move  off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having  un- 
masked the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
respectively  command  :  By  the  left  flank — March, 


204  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

and  By  the  right  Jlanh — March  ;  and  as  soon  as 
these  sections  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, they  will  command,  As  skirmishers — March. 
The  groups  will  then  deploy  according  to  prescribed 
principles,  on  the  right  gronp  of  the  left  section, 
which  will  be  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the 
point  indicated. 

ir)9.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment 
made  by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved 
to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated,  and  halted 
after  passing  some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the 
first  platoon  ;  the  deployment  will  then  be  made  by 
the  flank  according  to  the  principles  prescribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  rally  them 
on  the  battalion,  he  will  command: 

Rally  071  the  hattalion. 

161.  At  this  command,  the  sKirmishers  and  the  re- 
serve, no  matter  what  position  the  company  to  which 
they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will  rap- 
idly unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing 
themselves  in  a  run  towards  its  nearest  flank,  and 
then  form  in  its  rear. 

162.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond 
thelineof  filaclosers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick  step, 
and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  reform 
his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing 
on  which  it  is  rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  the  rank 
of  the  file  closers.  These  subdivisions  will  not  be  mov- 
ed except  by  order  of  the  commander  of  the  battalion, 
who  may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them  into  line  of 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  COS 

battle  at  the  extremities  of  the  line,  or  in  the  inter- 
vals between  the  battalions. 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the 
same  wings  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter  what- 
soever, they  should  be  formed  always  into  close  col- 
umn, or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of 
skirmishers,  shall  be  formed  into  square,  the  phitoons 
and  sections  of  the  covering  company  will  be  directed 
by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be 
opened  at  the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who 
will  be  then  formed  into  close  column  by  platoons  in 
rear  of  the  first  front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of 
the  square  fr(»m  being  opened,  the  skirmishers  will 
throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank  men, 
the  right  knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece  rest- 
ing on  the  thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  position. 
Apart  ma}'  also  place  themselves  about  the  angles, 
where  they  can  render  good  service  by  defending  the 
sectors  without  fire. 

168.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are 
rallied  be  in  colimm  ready  to  forju  square,  the  skir- 
mishers will  be  formed  into  close  column  by  platoon, 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the 
command.  Form  square  March,  they  will  move  for- 
ward and  close  on  the  buglers. 

167.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon 
or  section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be 
wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank  towards  the   intervals  on  the 


206  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

wings,  and  be  then  deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front  of 
the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  inte- 
rior of  squares  or  columns,  are  to  be  deployed,  they 
will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then  thrown 
forward,  as  is  prescribed,  No.  157  ;  as  soon  as  they 
shall  have  unmasked  the  column  or  square,  they  will 
be  deployed,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left 
file. 

The  assemhly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  as- 
sembled when  there  is  no  longer  danger  of  its  being 
disturbed ;  the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  in 
quiclt  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmish- 
ers on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 


Assemble  on  the  reserve. 


171.  Atthis  command,  the  skirmishers  will  assemble 
by  groups  of  fours  ;  the  fiont  rank  men  will  place  them- 
selves behind  their  rear  rank  men  ;  and  each  group  of 
fours  will  direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where  each  will 
take  its  proper  place  in  the  ranks.  When  the  com- 
pany is  re-formed,  it  will  rejoin  the  battalion  to  which 
it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skirmish- 
ers on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line, 
either  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble^them  on 
the  centre  while  marching,  he  will  command : 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  207 


Assemble  on  the  centre. 


174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  con- 
tinue to  uiaich  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  aidi- 
cated  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing  file  will  fol- 
low the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank  man ; 
the  other  two  comrades  of  this  group,  and  likewise 
those  on  their  left,  will  march  diagonally,  advancing 
the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the  gait,  so  as  tore- 
form  the  groups  while  drawing  nearer  and  nearer  the 
directing  file  ;  the  men  of  the  right  section  will  unite 
in  the  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then  upon  the 
directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right  shoulder.  As 
they  successively  uLite  on  the  centre,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  be  ex- 
ecuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will 
also  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  the 
front  rank  men  marching  behind  their  rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt, 
and  on  the  line  they  occupy,  the  captain  w^ill  give  the 
same  commands;  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right 
or  left,  according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right  or 
left  flank,  re-form  the  groups  while  marching,  and  thus 
arrive  on  the  file  which  served  as  the  point  of  forma- 
tion. As  they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmishers 
will  support  arms. 


208  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  deploy  a  hattallon  as  sJcirmisJicrs,  and  to 
rally  this  hattalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

178.  A  battalion  beiug  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  com- 
mander should  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  companies  in 
reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  adjutant,  and  also  to  the  major,  who  will 
be  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will 
point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  the  direction  he 
wishes  to  give  the  line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  he 
wishes  the  right  of  the  sixth  company  to  rest,  and  to 
the  commander  of  the  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish  it 
established. 

179.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly  in 
front  of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and  the  adju- 
tant in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  c<tmpany.  The 
commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the  man- 
ner to  be  hereinafter  indicated, 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  First  (ov  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers. 
2.'  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — take  inter- 
vals. 

3.  March  Cor  double  quick — March j. 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the 
fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  prepare  to  deploy  the 


M4 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  209 

first  plat(Hins  t»f  their  respective  coinpauies,  the  sixth 
on  its  right,  the  fifth  on  its  left  file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face 
it  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh  and 
eighth  conipaniefe  will  face  their  repective  companies 
to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence.  The  platoons  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  com- 
panies will  deploy  forward  ;  the  right  guide  of  the  sixth 
will  march  on  the  point  which  will  bemdicated  to  him 
by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

184.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and 
also  the  companies  which  h;ive  fiiced  to  the  left,  will 
march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  company  will 
take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from 
the  left  of  the  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its  first 
platoon  on  its  left  file.  The  seventh  and  eighth  compa- 
nies will  each  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces, 
counting  from  the  first  file  of  the  company,  which  is 
immediately  on  its  right;  and  the  chiefs  of  these  com- 
panies will  afterwards  deploy  their  first  platoons  on  the 
right  file. 

185.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the 
deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  them- 
selves towards  the  outei  man  of  the  neighboring  com- 
pany, already  deployed  as  skirmishers  ;  or  if  the  com- 
pany has  n«  t  finished  its  deployment,  they  will  judge 
carefully  the  distance  which  may  still  be  required  to 
place  all  these  files  in  line,  and  will  then  march 
on  the  point  thus  marked  out.     The  companies,  as  they 


210  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  themselves  on  those  alrea- 
dy deployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow 
the  deployment,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the 
left;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will  place  them- 
selves near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  estab- 
lished in  echellou  in  the  following  manner:  the  re- 
serve of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  one  hundred 
and  fifty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company; 
the  reserves  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united, 
opposite  the  centre  of  their  line'  of  skirmishers,  and 
thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  com- 
pany ;  the  reserves  of  the  seventh  and  eighth  compa- 
nies, also  united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of 
skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  farther  to  the  rear  than 
the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  com 
posing  the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the 
colonel  to  that  effect,  will  march  these  companies  thir- 
ty paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them  into  coir 
umn  by  company,  at  half  distance  ;  after  which,  he  will 
conduct  the  column  tr)  the  point  which  shall  have  been 
indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintend- 
ence of  the  movement;  and  when  it  is  finished,  will 
move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his 
view  may  best  embiaceall  the  parts,  in  order  to  di- 
rect their  movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired 
to  deploy  by  the  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth  companies 
will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve  paces  halted, 
and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  tho 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  211 

other  on  the  left  file,  by  the  means  already  indicated. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the 
flank  ;  and  as  soon  as  the  last  file  of  the  company,  next 
towards  the  direction,  shall  have  taken  its  interval,  it 
will  be  moved  upon  the  line  established  by  the  fifth 
and  sixth  companies,  halted  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  battalion  was  in  the  order  of  battle;  but  if  in 
column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skiiinishers  by  the 
same  coumiands  and  according  to  the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  mside  forward,  the 
directing  company,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be 
moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indicated. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to 
the  right  or  left,  and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is  taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank, 
the  directing  company  will  be  moved  in  the  same 
manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  immasked,  and  will 
then  be  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank  on  the  file 
indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be  march- 
ed by  the  flank,  and  when  its  interval  is  taken,  will  be 
moved  on  the  line,  halted,  and  deployed  as  soon  as  the 
company  next  towards  the  direction  shall  have  fin- 
ished its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves  in 
echellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  ral- 
ly, be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  i7ijuring  each 
other;  and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  compa- 
nies have  been  united,  in  order  to  diminish  the  number 


212  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

of  the  echellons,  and  to  increase  their  capacity  for  re- 
sisting cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend 
from  right  to  left,  but  they  may,  on  an  indication 
from  the  colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted  on  the  same 
principle,  so  as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

196.  When  the  color  company  is  to  be  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  the  color,  without  its  guard,  will  be  de- 
tached  and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 


The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  canee  all  the  various  move- 
ments prescribed  for  a  company,  to  be  executed  by  the 
battalion,  and  by  the  same  conmiands  and  the  same 
signals.  When  he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will 
cause  th&rally  on  the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will 
so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to  protect  this  movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be 
rallied  in  squares  on  their  respective  reserves  ;  each 
reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form  the  first 
front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections 
on  the  flanks ;  the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will 
complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth 
front.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  superintend  the 
rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form  them 
into  two  ranks,  without  regard  to  height,  and  cause 
them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of 
squares  will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry 
may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by  march- 


1 

..-«*. 

/' 

DEI -::::i 

1 

i           i 
1 

••    • 

"  -  -      5 

1-     s 

1  amii 

4 
* 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

i 

1 

mm        ..A 

If    • 

-_ i 

INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  213 

iDg  upon  the  battalion  reserve,  or  by  seeking  an  ad- 
vantageous position  ;  to  tliis  end,  each  of  the  squares 
will  be  formed  into  column,  and  march  in  this  order ; 
and  if  threatened  anew,  it  will  halt,  and  again  form 
itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the 
battalion  reserve,  each  will  re-form  as  promptly  as 

Eossible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or  num- 
er,  take  place  in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  com- 
panies already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if 
itself  threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  com. pa- 
nics in  marching  towards  it  will  place  themselves 
promptly  in  the  sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march 

m  the  squares. 


fc:ND   OF  INSTRUOTfO:-*    FOR  SKiUMISFIeRS 


214  SWORD  MANUAL,  ETC. 


MANUAL   OF   THE    SWORD    OR    SA- 
BRE,   FOR  OFFICERS. 

POSITION  OF  TH-E  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 


The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which 
will  be  supported  against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of 
the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

TO  SALuTE  WITH  THE  SWORD    OR  SABRE. 

Three  times  [oy pauses.) 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person 
to  be  saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicular- 
ly, the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  the  right 
eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  el- 
bow supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  ex- 
tending the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be  brought 
to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in  that  posi- 
tion until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is  rendered 
shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place 
the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 


COLOR-SALUTE,  ETC.  215 

COLOR-SALUTE. 


In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or 
in  march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance 
supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  gener^iUy 
placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to 
h(dd  it  steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors, 
the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows  : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along 
the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye  ;  lower  the  lance  by 
straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the  heel  of  the 
lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring  back  the  lance  to 
the  habitual  position  when  the  person  saluted  shall 
be  pa&sed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 


.     MANUAL 

FOR  RELIEVING  SENTINELS. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  fiie  lock 
to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with 
both  hands,  the  right  at'the  handle,  the  left  at  the  lower 
band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the  muzzle,  the 


216  RELIEVING  SENTINELS. 

barrels  sloping  upwards  and  crossing  opposite  the  point 
of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  proportional.}-  lowered. 
The  palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of 
the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails  of  both  hands  next 
to  the  body,  to  which  the  eldows  will  be  closed. 


Shoidder—ARMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


(First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  heii^ht  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

(Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the 
side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arras,  if  it  be  wished 
to  give  the  men  rest,  the  command  will  be : 


Parade — REST. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of 
the  butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in, front  of 
the  centfe  of  the  body ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with 
the  left  hand  just  above,  and  wdth  the  right  at  the  up- 
per band  ;  carry  the  right  foot  six^inches  to  the  rear, 
the  left  knee  slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ET€.         217 

INSTRUCTION 
FOR  THE  CHIEF  BUGLER  AND  DRmiJVIAJOR. 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  have  been 
given,  Title  I,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column,  in  manoeuvre,  the  field  music  and  band 
will  march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  company,  and 
on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passage  of  de- 
files to  the  front  or  in  retreat,  they  will  march  at  the 
head  of  their  respective  battalions. 

GENERAL  CALLS. 


1. 

2. 

Attention. 
The  general. 

3. 

The  assembly. 

4. 

To  the  color. 

5. 

The  recall. 

6. 

Quick  time. 

7. 

Double  quick  time. 

8. 

The  charge. 

9. 

The  reveille. 

10. 

Retreat. 

11. 

Tattoo. 

12. 

To  extinguish  lights. 

13. 

Assembly  oj  the  buglers. 

14. 

Assembly  of  the  guard. 

15. 

Orders  for  orderly  sergeants 

15* 

INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC. 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  places  in  line 

after  firing. 
17;   The  disperse. 

18.  Officers^  call. 

19.  Breakfast  call. 

20.  Dinner  call. 

21.  Sick  call. 

22.  Fatigue  call. 

23.  Church  call. 

24.  Drill  call. 

25.  School  call. 

CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  Fix  bayonet. 

2.  U7ifiz  bayonet. 

3.  Quick  time. 

4.  Double   Quick  time. 

5.  The  Run. 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers. 

7.  Forward. 

8.  /n  retreat. 

9.  ifaZf. 

10.  £2/  <Ac  right  flank. 

11.  By  the  left  flank. 

12.  Commence  firing. 

13.  Cease  firing. 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right. 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC.         219 

16    Lie  doicn. 

17.  Rise  up. 

18.  Rally  by  fours. 

19.  Rallf  by  sections. 

20.  Rally  by  platoons. 

21.  Rally  on  the  reserve. 

22.  Rally  on  the  battalion. 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion. 


Note. — "When  the  whole  of  the  troops,  in  the  same 
camp  or  garrison,  are  to  depart,  the  general,  the  assem- 
bly, and  to  the  color  will  be  beaten  or  sounded,  at  the 
proper  intervals,  in  the  order  here  mentioned.  At 
the  first,  the  troops  will  prepare  for  the  movement ;  at 
the  second,  they  will  form  by  company,  and  at  the 
third  unite  by  battalion. 


i 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SHJNS. 
Moveiiieiif  oftlie  inelroiioniti  , 

76-  J—     -ff^  4-'     "V  76  steps  (o  tL^' mimit. 

80=  J  — 


100=  J  •- 


120=  .'- 


or    80  bars  t..  tht-  uiiiiute. 


ir    loo  sft-ps  to  tilt-  iTiiiiutt 


120  steps  to  tlieniiiiutt 


SiUiice  .  .  -  _  D^^mi  silt'iio-  . .  ^i 


GEiNEKAL  CALLS. 


1  _  ATTENTION  . 

120  =  J  All.-v. 


221 


222 


2.-Tiib:  (i^:^^:HAL . 


^P^^^yR^j^^zJ 


-THK    \ssK\lin.V  . 


80: 


J    Vl'l-Ult«'   . 


;«=p: 


1^^^^^^=^^^ 


~^^Zj9'^IBMt-:-0- 


22; 


4 -TO  THE  COLOR 

80  =d  Aiidaut.-. 

3t 


^^^\z^l 


^ 


^ 


•     ##  # 


^gg^iJ-Jia^ 


^ 


P=F*= 


^i^il' 


#-T 


5.-THK    H  EC  ALL  . 


G-QUICK  TIME  . 

nOr  J  Allefrrc. 


^^5:f-S^lg 


^^ 


224 


^as^a 


^-^l^Ecsiia^ 


7. -DOUBLE  glKK  TIMK  . 

16F.=  J   Allrf.i(.  . 


^^^^^1^ 


22S 


teJifitfTf^^^^zriS^ 


-4rirr^^^ 


lUJ. 


8- THE  CHAHGi: 

f/p  8-<f # #— # 0 

^  ^^  ^  ' 

ip^ 


^^s 


# — # 


^3 


^^^te 


-^^E^-*=- 


225 


!!.-  THE   liEXKILLK 


ill) 


=  J.AIl.siio 


W 


^^^^^ 


m^^^m^ 


10-  HKTHI  AT. 

76=^   Aiulanl*'. 


i^pg^lS^jma 


^P^B^^^ 


ii27 


11  .-TATTOO  . 


^>— zzx 


8  — 


m^ 


^^^fW^fffff^ 


£S 


wmrr^ 


pmfJrnhm^m 


^ 


^lUf^nrTfl 


i 


Sr^^^li-^.^^^^^ 


?^ 


^^ 


if^^ffgt^^^p 


^^^TfTfrM^jg^:^ 


i 


^ 


^  /T\ 


!J^r_jL^P   I  r=t=f^3--g^ 


pi 


228 


t 


12  -  TO  EXTI^riUISH    LI(;HTS 

76  =  J  Allegro. 


If 


I 


^=^^^ 


u^f^fm^m^-^ 


13.- ASSEMBLY  OF  THE   BlKiEERS. 

160= J   Presto  . 


^^^igP^Si 


m 


^—i—y-pi:  #  ^  /» 


^a 


14.-  ASSEMBLY     OF  THE  GUARD  . 
il2=J  Allegro. 


'2  29 


m^w^Wf 


0. 


i 


■d 


l^.-OHDKHS   KOH  ORDERLY  SERGEAINTS 

'2=  J  Al^-rc. 


^ 


^W[gm 


»  I   ,  -g 


33 


LkJ  'LkJ  ^IB 


16 -FOR  OFFICKHS  TO  TAKE   THEIR  PLACES 
lA   LINE' AFTER  FIRING. 

108  =  J.  AJlef^ro.  r^ 


i 


i 


17=  THE     )ISPERSE  . 

120  =  J  Alleirro. 


^ 


!? 


izt: 


230 


^mm 


^5 


18.- OFFICE  US    CAl 
2~'#T 


^^^^P^ 


^ 


^^^^^P^ 


1M.--PI5EAKFAST    CALL  . 

''0 .  O 


2-4-  — 


W^ 


.V.4h» 


fer-F: 


23i 


'20-l)I^^EH  CALL. 

110  =J  All.-oiu. 


^^^^^^m 


iif -SICK  CALL  . 

flO=J  Alh^^ro. 


q-^^-*- 


^E»^ 


^ 


I 


V.2- FATIGUE   CALL. 

•  2 -J  A;ietj:vt. . 


P^^i^^ 


^^^^3TiI^ 


232 


4tji'  I  E^^rTrrrrrr^ 


^jjjt^^ 


im 


23.-(;hliu;h  cam,. 

80.-0  AiKhnite. 


^^^^ 


-^^^^m^^^M 


^m 


1 


Z^^S^r^flZ^ 


^m 


24.-i)f{iiJ    *:all 


i^ 


Ng^i^s^l 


233 


^ 


±r 


^ 


fe^gj 


^ 


t^=w^w^^^^ 


^. 


m 


^ 


iiSr-  SCHOOL    CALL 
Mp.J  Alle<rio 


>  ^^ 


r^ 


r> 


t=t3 


e-^^ 


#^ 


-#-#t: 


234. 


CALLS   FOR  SKIRMISHERS 


l.-FIX  BATOINET. 


^^ 


^^mrf^^^ 


2  -UNFIX    BAYONET. 

80=c)  AiKiaii^e. 


3.-yr  u;k  time. 

(Musi<-  tin-  sH.r.H  .s  i.,'^"  (GENERAL  CALL?) 


23  fi 


4.-i)()lJKI.K  Q[I(;k  TIME. 


fe 


# 


^^ 


^^^ 


m 


233? 


^^5^ 


^ 


^i/ 


-I— ^^  I  i#T# 


ffi 


fe^Rr^f^^^l 


,       5.-THE    HIT^ 


^g^^5^3jj^l^il 


236 


$ 


6-I)i:i>L()V    AS  SKlMMrSHEKS, 

110  =  J    AIN'^r... 


$ 


ETiiL^iai 


7=  KOKUAHJ). 
160  =  J  Pi.sto. 


tTTX3^^^^ 


(h     J  J'J  < 


i=2: 


tj 


i 


^^^^^^^m 


8.-IIN  retri:at. 

7G=J   All.^To. 


:?^ffhe 


B3S3Mg 


23  7 


9.-HALT. 


160  =  J      PIHSIC 


^^^^^^^m 


^i 


lO.-l'Y  THi:  HHiHT   FLA^K. 


K" 


3 


s 


ES 


r~fr'r~tr 


^     /o^ 


ia 


11  -  in  THE  LEFT   FLA^K  . 

160 -J   Pmsto. 


-Mi^±f-^-{i^^ 


EES 


#-# 


^ 


/^ 


r\  r\ 


w-n^ 


m^ 


I 


i 


160  =  J  Presto  . 


pgBB^ 


238 


17,  -CEASE    FIR  IN  (i. 

SO -J  Modeinto.  Ov 

rirr^T  i  ft  fi 


14  -CHANGE   DIRECTION  TO  THE  RIGHT. 

110- J  Allegro. 


I 


ii 


^m 


r\     r\_ 


r> 


H 


l.^.-CHVNfiE    I)IKi:CTION  TO  THE  LEFT. 

.  110    -  i     \I!roi„.  _^ 


^ 

■^i 


^^ 


pr= 


-51    • 


Hi- LIE    HOWiN. 


-jR n- 


^==± 


239 


17- RISE  LP. 


P^^^^^^ 


iH-HALLY    HY   FOUHS 


i:^^^^^ 


i^)-H\I.LV    BY  SECTIONS. 


^^m^^^^ 


jfeaitHFj 


^^m 


2l'-.{\I.U     r.Y  I>L\T00i\S 

liO=j      Alho,M. 


as 


^ 


#^^p^^^^ 


2  40 


21.-RALLY  ON  THE   RESERVE 

76==#  Aii(l;uite  . 


^T^mmm 


$ 


r\ 


i 


:p=1^ 


22.-  ^.ALL^'  GIN   THE  BATTALION. 

*  76 -J    Auhuit*.. 


-{^-^ 


f!=5:,H^^^=^^ 


m 


IMZ^ZZME. 


23.-  ASSEMBLE  0^  THE  BATTALION. 

80  =  J    Audaulf;. 


I 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 
Vol.  I. 


TITLE  FIRST. 
Article  First. 

Page. 

Formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line  5 

Posts  of  company  officers,  sergeants  and  corporals  7 

Posts  of  field  officers  and  regimental  staff 8 

Posts  of  field  music  and  band 9 

Color-guard 9 

General  guides 10 

Article  Second.* 

Instruction  of  the  battalion 11 

Instruction  of  officers 13 

Instruction  of  sergeants 14 

Instruction  of  corporals 14 

Commands 15 

(24i; 


242  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

TITLE  SECOND 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

PART  FIRST. 

Page. 
General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 
soldier 16 

Lesson  /—Position  of  the  soldier  (No.  78.)  Eyes 
right,  left  and  front  (Nos.  80, 83; 18 

Lesson //—Facings  (Nos.  88,91) 23 

Lesson  ///—Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  com- 
mon and  quick  time  (Nos.  94,  102) 24 

Lesson  IV — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step 
(No.  104) 26 

PART  SECOND. 

General  rules 28 

Lesson  /—Principles  of  shouldered  arms 29 

Lesson  //—Manual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No. 
133.)  Present  arms  (No.  143.)  Order  arms 
(No.  147.)  Position  of  order  arms  (No.  149.) 
Load  in  nine  times  (No.  156.)  Ready  (No.* 
171.)  Aim  (No.  174.)  Fire  fNo.  177.)  Fix 
bayonet  (No.  188. )    Charge  bayonet  (No.  193.) 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  243 

Trail  arms  (No.  197.)  Unfix  bayonet  (No.  200.) 
Secure  arms  (No.  204.)  Right  shoulder  shift 
arms  fNo.  210.;  Arms  at  will  CNo.  219.; 
Ground  arms  (No.  222.)  Inspection  arms  CNo. 
227.)  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms  (No. 
237.)  Mark  time  (No.  241.)  Change  step  (No. 
245.)    March  backwards  (No.  247) 30 

Lesson  ///—Load  in  four  times  (No.  250.) 
Load  at  will  (No.  257; 5C 

Lesson  IF — Firings.  Direct  fire  (No.  261.) 
Oblique  firings  (No.  266.)  Position  of  the  two 
ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to  the  right  (No.  267.) 
Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire 
to  the  left  CNo.  270.)  Fire  by  file  (No.  275.; 
fire  by  rank  (No.  285; 57 

Lesson  V — Fire  and  load  kneeling  (No.  292.) 
Fire  and  load  lying,  fNo.  300.; 63 

Lesson  T/— Bayonet  exercise 65 

PART  THIRD. 

Lesson  I — Alignments 67 

Lesson  //—March  by  the  front  (No.  325.)  March 
by  the  front  in  double  quick  time  (No  334.) 
Face  about  in  marching  (No.  343.)  March 
backwards  [No.  345] 70 

Lesson  ///—March  by  the  flank  [No.  351.] 
March  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time  [No. 
368] 76 


244  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Page. 
Lesson  IV — General  Principles  of  wheeling  [No. 

377.]  Wheeling  from  a  halt  [No.  383.]  Wheel- 
ing in  marching  [No.  393.]  Turning  [No. 
400.]    Wheeling  and  turning  in  double  quick 

time  [No.  403] 80 

Lesson  V — Long  marches  in  double  quick  time 
and  the  run  [No.  406.]  Stack  arms  [No.  410.] 
Take  arms  [No.  413] 67 


TITLE  THIRD. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the 
company 90 

Lesson  First. 

Article  /—To  open  ranks  [No.  8] 93 

Article  //—Alignments  in  open  ranks  [No.  18..]  95 

Article  ///—Manual  of  arms  [No  26] 97 

Article  IV— To  close  ranks  [No.  28] 98 

Article  V — Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  In 

closed  ranks  [No.  30] 98 


table  of  contents.        245 

Lesson  Second. 

Page. 
Article  I— To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  ■mil  (No. 

44) 100 

Article  //—To  fire  by  company  (No.  48) 101 

Article  Ill—To  fire  by  file  (No.  55) 102 

Article  IV— To  fire  by  rank  (No.  58) 103 

Article  F— To  fire  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  68)...  105 

Lesson*  Third. 


Article  I— To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  84).  108 
Article  II— -To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  99) Ill 

Article  ///—Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No. 

101) Ill 

Article  IV— To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double 

quick  time,  and  the  back  step  (No.  109) 113 

Article  V — To  march  in  retreat  (No.  119) 115 


Lesson  Fourth. 

Article  I— To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  135) 118 

Aiticle  II— To  change  direction  by  file  (No.  142)  120 
Article  III — To  halt  the  company,  marching  by 
the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  145)  121 


246  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Article  IV — The  company  being  in  march  by  the 
flank,  to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into 
lineofbattle  (No.  148) 121 

Article  V — The  company  marching  by  the  flank, 
to  form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching 
(No.  153) 123 

Lesson*  Fifth 
Article  I — To  break  into  column    by    platoon, 

either  at  a  halt,  or  marching  (No.  171) 127 

Article  //—To  march  in  column  CNo.  195) 132 

Article  III— To  change  direction  (No.  211; 135 

Article  IV— To  halt  the  column  (No.  231 ) 140 

Article  V — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 
to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at 
a  halt,  or  marching  (No.  235) 140 

Lesson  Sixth. 
Article  I— To  break  the  company  into  platoons, 

and  to  re-form  the  company  (No.  265) 146 

Article  II— To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to 

cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line  (No.  289) 150 

Article  III— To  mai-ch  in  column  in  route,  and 

to  execute  the  movements  incident  thereto  (No. 

306; 154 

Article  /F—Countermarch  (No.  334) 160 


table  of  contents.  247 

Page. 

Article  V — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form 
on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  343).  162 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  int(T  sin- 
gle rank,  and  reciprocally 'CNo.  359) 165 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four 
and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  marching  (No. 
371) 167 

INSTRUCTION 
FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction.  171 
Article  First. 

Deployments  (No.  15).  Deploy  forward  (No.  22. ) 
Deploy  by  the  flank  CNo.  37).  Extend  interval  Is 
CNo.  51 ;.  Close  intervals  CNo.  59;.  Relieve 
skirmishers   CNo.  66J 174 

Article  Second. 

March  to  the  front  CNo.  71^.  March  in  retreat 
CNo.  79).  Change  direction  (No.  86.)  March 
by  the  flank  (No.  96) 186 


248  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Article  Third. 

Page. 

Firings  (No.  106).  Fire  at  a  halt  (No.  107.)  Fire 
marching  [No.  111].    Observations  [No.  120].  191 

Article  Fourth. 

Rally  [No.  127].  Rally  by  sections  [No.  132]. 
Rally  by  platoons  [No.  137].  Rally  on  the  re- 
serve [No.  139].  Formcolumn[No.l43].  Rally 
on  the  battalion  [No.  161  ].  Assemble  on  the 
reserve  [No.  171].  Assemble  on  the  centre 
[No.  174] 197 


Article  Fifth. 

Deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers  [No.  178]. 

Observations  [No.  194].    Rally  [No.  197]....  208 

Manual  of  the  sabre  for  officers 214 

Salute  of  the  color 215 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels 215 

Instruction  for  parade   rest 216 

Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  &c 217 

General  calls - 217 

Calls  for  skirmishers 218 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  249 

MUSIC. 
GENERAL  G^LLS. 

Page. 

1.  Attention 221 

2.  The  general 222 

3.  The  assembly 222 

4.  Tothecolor 223 

5.  The  recall 223 

6.  Quicktime 223 

7.  Double  quick  time 224 

8.  The  charge 225 

9.  The  reveille 226 

10.  Retreat 226 

11.  Tattoo 227 

12.  To  extinguish  lights 228 

13.  Assembly  of  the  buglers 228 

14.  Assembly  of  the  guard 228 

1 5.  O  rders  for  orderly  sergeants 229 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  places  in  line  after 

firing 229 

17.  The  disperse 229 

18.  Officers'   call 230 

19.  Breakfast  call 230 

20.  Dinnercall 231 

21.  Sick  caU 231 

22.  Fatigue  call 231 

23.  Church  call 232 

24.  Drill  call 232 

25.  School  call 233 


250  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISH:EES. 

Page 

1.  Fix  bayonet 231 

2.  Uufix  bayonet 23-1 

3.  Quick  time 234 

4.  Double  quick  time 21^ 

5.  The  run 1 235 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers 236 

7.  Forward 236 

8.  In  retreat 236 

9.  Halt 237 

10.  By  the  right  flank 237 

11.  By  the  left  flank 237 

12.  Commence  firing 237 

13.  Cease  firing 2".?8 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right 2'.i8 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left 238 

16.  Lie  down 2:J8 

17.  Rise  up 239 

18.  Rally  by  fours 239 

19.  Rally  by   sections 235) 

20.  Rally  by  platoons 239 

21.  Rally  on  the  reserve 240 

22.  Rally  on  the  battalion 210 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion 2-10 

END  OP  VOL.  I. 


! 

I 


A4 


